imageRUNNER , 5 0 0 O Series User’s Guide — _ imageRUNNER 5000 SeriesPREFACE ‘Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series. This Manual describes the method of using the imageRUNNER 5000 Series, its Copy and Mail Box functions, and the parts that are common to each funetion. Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the imageRUNNER 5000 Series in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual store it in a safe place for future reference. CAUTION: In this manual, CAUTION MESSAGES with this 4 symbol indicate that neglecting the suggested procedure or practice could result in personal injury. NOTICE: Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, some of the data contained herein may not exactly reflect the current model of the particular product with which this manual has been included. If you have a need for an exact specification, please contact Canon for the current specification. This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without prior written consent of Canon Inc. Copyright ©2000 Canon Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED International Energy Star-Program ‘As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined that this, copier model meets the ENERGY STAR® Program for energy efficiency. The International ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. Its an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial ‘environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if ‘ot installed and used in accordance with the Operator's Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.How This Manual is Organized Dens dora Sous Fheeren Soren LL Before You Start Using This Machine This chapter describes the name and function of each part of the machine, and also the ‘method of placing an original after switching ON the machine, Basic Copying This chapter describes the basic copy functions. Useful Copy Functions This chapter describes more advanced copy functions Using the Mail Box Functions This chapter describes the Mail Box functions that enable you to temporarily store or print data Printing Efficiently This chapter describes how to make the next copy, or a print from another function, while-a. prints being made, how to check the printing status, and how to change or cancel printing Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs ‘This chapter describes the default settings and how to change them to suit your needs, Loading Paper and Adding Toner “This chapter deserves how te load paper and add toner. Troubleshooting “This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality Handling Options This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an optional unit. Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters ‘This chapter describes how to use the Control Card, enter characters, etc. Appendix This chapter describes the specications ofthis machine and optional unt, index, et ‘Some information in this manual is also relevant when using the Printer functions etc. of the ImageRUNNER 5000. Please use this manual in combination with the other manuals (printer man- ual etc.) when using the printer functions, How This Manual is OrganizedSafety Information A. Laser Safety This Product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the US. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard accord- ing to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the Product does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the Product is completely contined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam can not escape from the machine during any phase of user opera- tion B. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. DANGER: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. VORSICHT: —_UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN, ABDECKUNG GEOFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG UERBRUKT | NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. | ATTENTION: — RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS. D'OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU. A caution ise of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the man- ual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CANON INC. 3-30-2 SHIMOMARUKO, OHTA-KU, TOKYO, JAPAN, | CANON U.S.A., INC | ONE CANON PLAZA, LAKE SUCCESS, N.Y. 11042, U.S.A. CANON CANADA INC. 6390 DIXIE ROAD MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO LST, 1P7, CANADA MANUFACTURED: THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD, 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J. 4 Safety InformationFunctions of This Machine and Related Manuals ‘The imageRUNNER 5000 Series can also be used on a network and/ or as a printer. Refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function as well as this manual. ©) meortant You can use the imageRUNNER 5000S as a network printer, or use the Remote Ul when the Network ‘Muli-PDL Printer Kit-At is attached, For details, contact your service representative. + The imageRUNNER 500ON has a printer function as a standard function. imageRUNNER 5000S Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit-A1 Network Guide Describes how to use the machine in various network environments, PS/PCL Reference Guide Describes the various settings and what to do if trouble occurs when using the PS/PCL function, PCL Driver Guide Describes how to install the PCL printer river and how to use it imageRUNNER 5000N Remote UI User's Guide Describes how to operate the machine from ‘personal computer. Setup Guide ‘The Setup Guide describes how to connect the machine to @ network and to install and Use softwares that enables you to print from a personal computer. PS Driver Guide Describes how to install the PS printer cliver and how to use it. Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release. ey Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals 5Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual ———S——— This machine makes effective use of a memory in order to perform print operations efficiently. For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can scan the next person's original to make a copy without any need to wait. You can also print from this machine by using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a ‘complex way, 50 not only copies but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be output. To avoid contusion when reading this manual, the terms “scanning’, “printing” and “copying” used in this manual are defined as set out below. There are some cases in which the scanning of an original when making a copy, and the process of making a print are described separately. Scanning: ‘Scanning an original to be copied, or scanning an original to be stored as data Outputting a copy, outputting data stored in a box, or outputting data sent from a personal computer to the machine. Copying: Printing data scanned from an original, followed by finishing (stapling, etc.) 6 Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This ManualTable of Contents ——— How This Manual is Organized. Safety Information. Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals ... Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual. Table of Contents . How to Use This Manual... ‘Symbols Used in This Manual . Safety Considerations . . Installation... . Power Supply. . Handling . Maintenance and Inspections Consumables. eee Warning Indications... .. Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . Installation Precautions . Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . Select a Safe Power Supply .........-........08 Provide Adequate Installation Space. Seen e ween cea Moving the Machine. Handling Precautions: Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images . . What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do ... Various Kinds of Copies 7 You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience | ‘You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs. Setting the Spe Displaying a Guide Screen ..2.... 2. cee eee wees You can Read the Messages From the System Manager ........ 45 Functions that Conserve Power Consumption Energy Saver Mode. . Low-Power Mode. 7 oe Sleep Mode ............... Quiet Mode Daily Timer. . . . Other Useful Functions . oe wees Auto Drawer Switching Function ................44 Auto Clear Function... . sees Copy Waiting Time Display Function . . . Paper Supply Indicator Function Paper Output Table of Contents 7Chapter 1__ Before You Start Using This Mac Parts and Their Functions. .. External View..... Internal View Feeder........ Control Panel Parts and Functions 2.22... Main Power and Control Panel Power . . ‘Turing the Power ON . : Control Panel Power Switch Using the Touch Panel Display. Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display « Touch Panel Key Display .. Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel Placing Originals . Orientation of Originals ........... ceo 1-12 Placing an Original on the Piaten Giass - Placing Originals in the Feeder Available Paper Stock . . Chapter 2 Basic Copying Flow of Copy Operations Canceling a Copy Job Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . Caneeling with the “> Key . Selecting the Copy Paper Sizo (oper Se) ‘Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) Manual Paper Selection Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass .... Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)... . Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom). . .. .2-16 Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) 218 ‘Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) 2:20 Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery trom Being Cut (Entire Image) 2-22 Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper’ Sizes (Zoom Program) 2-23 Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) cee e evenness BBB Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (xp ea ‘Adjusting Copy Exposure. 2-32 Selecting Image Quality. . 2-33, Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality... ........ 2-35 ee 8 Table of ContentsChapter 3 Entering the Copy Quantity .. Specifying the Required Number of Copies Changing the Copy Quantity ‘Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode). Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1P2-Sided) . Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b2-Sided) Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2»1-Sided). ... .2-43 Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book >2-Sided). ce 2-45 Collating Copies (Firisher)........ 2-48 Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set). Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confimation). Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting ContimationiCancel)... 254 2-56 wee BST Useful Copy Functions Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation)... Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter 232 Pages to Copy Sets (CoveriSheet Insertion) . 4 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Bookie) . +39 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between ‘Transparencies (Transparency interleaving) see BB Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shit) . Making Copies with Margins (Margin). 3-16 348 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-21 Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals... . 3-23 Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . cece B25 3-28 Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image’ foomie +330 Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation) . Feeding Ditferent- (Oiferent Size Originals)... Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Wode Memory). . Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Job Storing a Memory Key Name. Recalling a Copy Job. oe Erasing a Copy Job....... 0.00005 Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)... Table of ContentsInverting Original Images (NegalPosi). Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror inage. Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness). .. Chapter 4 —_Using the Mail Box Functions Flow of Mail Box Operations . Storing Originals in the Box... . : Printing Documents Stored in the BOX.......... ee. 0eceeeeee seen 45 ‘Scanning Originals into a Box... ‘Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) ‘Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure) . Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio) Boouobo8 ‘Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original). : ‘Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in ‘One Step (Two-page Separation). ... te Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) ....... 4-27 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination).......... 437 ‘Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . 2 A4t Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) .. 4-43 inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi).... ce QS Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) AAT Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings. Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . Collating Prints (Finisher). ........-.....ec0e0ceeeeeeeeeenene! ‘Two-sided Printing (Two- sided Printing) . Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Pr inted Sets (Cover/Job Separator) . .. ceeeeee 457 Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) ........... sees 4-60 Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents)..........02++ cece 63. Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print)... beens 465 Checking the Documents Detailed Information. seeee 4-67 Changing the Name of a Document... .. 4-68 Moving a Document ... 4-70 Erasing a Document from a Box -4-72 10 Table of ContentsChapter5 —_ Printing Efficiently ‘Changing the Exposure During Printing. Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up. Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) ...... cee BB Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) 56 Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . 57 Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy) 57 Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) ...............5:9 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs ..............5-10 Checking and Changing Printing Status. . 513 hacking Detaled Information for Printing Documen........... 5:13 Canceling Printing . ceeeee 2515, Priority Printing . +516 Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer “518 Printing Secured Documents 5-20 ‘Checking the Printing History 5:22 Checking the Device Status. 25-24 Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Additional Functions Settings Table - 6-3 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings). Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone. 68 Setting Inch Input....... 69 Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection’ Auto Drawer Switching 610 Identitying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . 6-12 Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting 6-14 Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine... 6-15 Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . +815 Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals................6-16 Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. 617 Setting the Printing Priority... 6-18 Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass .................619 Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing.........-- weve 621 Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults - + 8-23 Table of Contents "Chapter 7 Setting the Timer (Timer Settings). . +624 Setting the Current Date and Time ..... cere B24 Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations... .6-25 Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations ..............seceeeeees 6-26 Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task... .6-27 Setting the Time That the Unit's Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week ..... aaa = 6-28 Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . 6-29 Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment(Cleaning) . Fine-adjusting Zoom When Difference: Print Image Occur . : Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher Changing the Saddle Stitch Position Adjusting the Standard Exposure Setting Specifications of the Copy Function cm sete, Setting Standard Keys . . Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off wee Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off... Setting the Job Duration Display................ Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function Changing the Current Standard Settings. Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function a ease. Setting/ Storing the Box.............. Initializing a Box...... Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function Setting the Standard mode for Scanning. . Setting Specifications of the System Management ID in Original Image and (System Settings) 6-54 Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID an 6-54 Setting the Department ID Management...........002.05 6-57 Setting Device Information. . . 6-69 Erasing a Message Board So 26-69 Printing the Report . Printing the Gontents of the Network Settings... Loading Paper and Adding Toner Loading Paper . . Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers 5 Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size ............ 7-6 ‘Adding Toner... ‘Consumables and Options Consumables Options. 12 Table of ContentsChapter 8 Troubleshooting Chapter 9 Removing Paper Jams .. Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam... 0.2.5 Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit........ 0... Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. . . Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. : Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4... Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder Routine Cleaning. Cleaning the Platen Cleaning the Feeder . Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes | (Feeder Cleaning) Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning). Self-diagnostic (Error) Display. . . If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning. . When the Power does not Turn ON . Service Call Message .. lass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . Handling Options ‘System Configuration. . Paper Deck-G1. Parts and Their Functions... 0.0.22... eeeee Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . Finisher-F1/ Saddle Fintsher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1. Parts and Their Functions : Collate Mode Group Mode. ..... Offset Mode........ Staple Mode vee Saddle Stitching Mode. .. Punch Mode ........ Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. ....... 5. Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit... . Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit bbe Removing Punch Waste .........0..e.ecceeeeeees Consumables. . bette eeeeeeee Table of Contents 13Copy Tray-C3..... Parts and Their Functions Seo Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tay-C3. .. Chapter 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled ........ 10-2 Inserting the Control Card cee 02 Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions 10-2 Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions 210-3 Entering the Department ID and Password. 10-4 Operations after Turning the Power ON....... : 10-4 Operations after Using Copy Functions 10-5 Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display. 10-6 Entering Alphabet Characters ....... 10-6 Entering Special Letters............ “10-7 Setting in Inches ... = 10-8 Chapter 11 Appendix Specifications . Main Unit Feeder.......... Paper Deck-Gt......... Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 ....... Puncher Unit-B1 Copy Tray-C3 . Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation, Chart of Available Combination of Functions. Copy FUNCHION eee eeeees eee wees =e Mall Box Function... 22.222... eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Index. 14 Table of ContentsHow to Use This Manual The descriptions in this manual are presented using the following general format. ha 4 Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (two-page ] Separain) > om Octet pig memento Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets 1 pe your opt on te ae res peat ore oar marin) Seonmtratmacviges ona ‘2 rena two poe pase “The above sampe page dovs not actualy exe inthis manval 1 Section Title 7 Reference 2 Chapter Title Page and chapter ‘numbers containing related items. 3 Description of modes and examples of g yoTEe output Indicates notes for operation or axdiional 4 IMPORTANT ‘explanations. Reading these is recommended Indicates operational warnings. Be certain toread —_Q Illustrations these items so that you operate the machine correctly. listrations to help you identi keys and pars ofthe 5 Subsection Title machine, 6 Operation Instructions Numbered steps describe how to set and operato various functions. How to Use This Manual 15Symbols Used in This Manual Indicates a warning concering operations that may lead to death or injury to A persons ifrot performed correc. In order to use the machine safely, aways WARNING pay attention to these warnings. Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lea to injury to persons or A CAUTION. d2tave fo propery If not performed correc. In oder to use the machine salely, always pay attonion to these cautions. Indicates operational warnings and restrictions. Be certain to read these items © imontant (Sprain machine corcty and aot damage the machine @ note Indicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is. recommended. The following symbols, keys names and ut Key on control panel names are used in this manual. Key on touch panel display +++++-++++- [OK] key Unless otherwise mentioned, screenshots of the touch panel display and illustrations used in this, manual are those taken when the Saddle Finisher-F2, and the Paper Deck-G1 are attached to the imageRUNNER 5000. Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options are not displayed in the touch panel display. ‘The keys which are to be operated are marked with CD as shown below in this manual 100% Auto 1 ears Seat be oval Sas Re CO] Sy set Sarat Tixi7a) [SMF Ci|[snTaa}] LA [ten eta When muitiple keys which should be operated are displayed in a touch panel display, all keys are marked. Select the key which sult your needs. Symbols Used in This ManualA caution Do not use power supplies with voltages other than 120V AC, as this may result in aire or ele: teal shock. + Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power plug. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise dam- age the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock. + Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable {to unplug it in an emergency. Handling A warnine * Do not attempt to disassemble or modity the machine. There are high-temperature and high- voltage components inside the machine which ‘may result in a fire or electrical shock. + Ifthe machine makes strange noises, or emits ‘smoke, heat or unusual smells, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the outlet. Then, contact your service representative. Continued use of the machine in this condition may result in a fire or electrical shock. 20 Safety ConsiderationsSafety Considerations Installation A WARNING + Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner or other inflammable substances. If inflammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result ina fire or electrical shock. + Do not place the following items on the machine. lt these items come into contact with a high-volt- age area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. = Necklaces and other metal objects = Cups, vases, flowerpots and other containers filled with water or liquids I these items are dropped or spilled inside the ‘machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the out- let. Then, contact your service representative. Avcaution Do not install the machine in unstable locations ‘uch a6 on ustoady platiorms or on inclined floors, ori locations which ae eubjec to exces: sive vibrations, as tis may cause the machine to fall or tp over, resulting In personal injury +Do not install the machine in such a way that the ventilation ports are blocked by objects. if the ventilation ports are blocked, heat will build up inside the machine and may result ina fire. + Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as, they may tip over or fall resulting in personal injury. Safety Considerations 718 + Do not install the machine in the following loca- tions. = Adamp or dusty location + Allocation which is exposed to direct sunlight = Alocation subject to high temperatures = Allocation that is subject to open flames + Do not remove the machine's fixing stoppers. after the machine has been installed, as this may ‘cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury. Power Supply A warning * Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in a fire or + Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shack. Safety Considerations+o not plug the machine into a multi-plug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock. + Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result ina fire or electrical shock. + Insert the power cord completely into the outlet, as failure to do so may result ina fire or electrical shock. + Do not use power cords other than the provided power cord, as this may result in a fire or electri- ‘cal shock. + As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or lectrical shock. an extension cord must be 1d, however, untie the cord binding and insert ‘the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power and extension cords. Safety Considerations 19+ Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes into contact with the electrical components inside the ‘machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. + When moving the machine, first turn OFF the power switch, and then unplug the power plug. Failure to do so will damage the power cord which may cause a fire or electrical shock. + Do not drop paper clips, staples or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine. Hf these items come into contact with a high-volt- age area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these Items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immedi- ately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the socket. Then, contact your service representative. A caution * Close the Feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in personal injury. + Do not touch the Finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal injury. + Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the machine will not be used for a long period of time ‘such as overnight. Also, unplug the power plug {or safety when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time such as during con- secutive holidays. ————$— $$ Safety Considerations 222 + Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling Is performed while a Finisher is. attached, as this may result in personal injury. Maintenance and Inspections A WARNING + When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock. + Clean the machine using a firmly wrung-out cloth ‘dampened with a mild cleansing detergent. Do ot use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. + Do not throw used toner bottles into open flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining Inside the bottles and result in burns or a fire. Safety ConsiderationsAccaution * Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of the plug’s metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result in a fire. «There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages and high temper tures. Take adequate precautions when perform- ing internal inspections to avoid burns or electrical shock. «The simbol A\, inside the machine indicates that the area is subject to high temperature, and not to be touched without care. + When removing jammed paper or when inspect- ing the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and ‘make it impossible to remove the toner stains. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed Paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper ‘from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. It toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immedi- ately with cold water and consult a physician. + When loading paper or removing jammed origk- nals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. + When removing used toner bottles from the toner ‘supply port, remove the bottles carefully to pre- vent toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician. Safety Considerations 23Consumables A warning * Do not throw toner bottles into open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a fi + Do not store toner bottles or paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire. + When discarding the toner bottles, put the bot- tles in a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and dispose of it as a non-flammable. Av caution * Keep toner and other consumables out of the teach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately. 24 Safety ConsiderationsWarning Indications A caution + The laser unit inside the machine emits laser light. Under no circumstances open the cover of the laser unit or remove the label attached to the cover. I the laser light escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes. Safety Considerations 25Periodic Inspection of the Breaker This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current, Be cure to test the breaker once or twice a month using the following procedure. © important “+ Make sure that the main power is turned ON, and the machine is neither printing nor scanning before starting periodic inspection of the breaker. + Ita maifunction occurs after a periodic inspection, contact your service representative. 1 Press the test button located at the bottom left of this machine. @ NOTE + Push the test bution wih the tip ofthe bal-point pen, etc + For details ofthe location ofthe breaker when the Finisher is attached, see “internal View,"on p. 1-3. 2 Push down the breaker lever to OFF (“O” side), and confirm that the power is cut OFF. ©) iwrortant + Do not use the test button to turn the power ON and OFF + If the breaker lever does not go to OFF (*O"* side), repeat step 1 + Ifthe breaker lever does not go to OFF (“O" side) despite carrying out the above procedure {wo or three times, contact your service repre- sentative. 3. once you confirmed that the above operation takes place, press the main power switch to OFF (“© side). 26 —_ Periodic Inspection of the Breaker4 Move the breaker lever to ON (“1” side). 5 Press the main power switch to ON (“1 side) 6 Filin the check sheet for the periodic inspection of the breaker at the end of this manual. Periodic Inspection of the Breaker 27Installation Precautions Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations + Avoid locations which are subject to low temperatures and low humidity, or high temperatures and high hut For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters and stoves. + Avoid installing the machine in the direct sunlight. I unavoidable, shade the machine using cur- tains. + Avoid poorly ventilated locations. During use, the machine generates ozone. However, the amount of ozone generated is not ‘enough to affect the human body. Neverthe- less, if the machine is used for a prolonged period of time in a poorly ventilated room, or when making a large quantity of prints, be sure to ventilate the room to make the working envi- ronment as comfortable as possible. + Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates. 28 Installation Precautions+ Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted. + Avoid locations near volatile flammables, such as alcohol or paint thinner. + Avoid locations which are subject to vibra- tions. For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands. rapid changes in temperature. Ifthe room in which the machine is installed is rapidly heated from a low temperature, con- densation may form inside the machine. This can adversely affect print quality or result in an inability to obtain print images. + Avoid installing the machine near comput- ers or other precision electronic equipment. Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment. + Avoid installing the machine near televi- sions, radios or other similar electronic equipment. The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception, etc. Plug the machine into a dedicated power outlet and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment. + About the machine's fixing stoppers. = Do not remove the machine's fixing stoppers after the machine has been installed, = Ifyou put weight on the front of the machine while the paper drawers or units within the machine are pulled out all the way, the machine might fall for- ‘ward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the machine's fixing stoppers are set in place. a Installation Precautions 29Select a Safe Power Supply + Plug the machine into a 120V AC outlet. + Do not plug other electrical equipment into ‘the outlet to which the machine is con- nected. + Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug power strip. Doing so might cause a fire. +The power cable may become damaged if it is often stepped on or heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cable can lead to an accident. Provide Adequate Installation Space + Provide enough space on each side of the. machine for unrestricted operation. 1H When the Paper Deck-Gi, the Saddle Finisher-F2, land the Puncher Unit-B1 are attached. (Each option in extended condition) rnore than 2 (Omi When the Copy Tray-C3 is attached. BSA (743 mm} ‘a (124mm) Se (749 mm 4 (284 mm) B25 (1,595 me) B51 2.162 me) Moving the Machine + Ifyou intend to move the machine, contact your service representative beforehand. 30 Installation PrecautionsHandling Precautions + Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. + Some parts inside the machine are subject to high voltages and temperatures. Take adequate precaution when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this manual. + Be careful not to drop any foreign objects such as paper clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into con- tact with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and result ina fire or an electrical shock. + Hf there is unusual noise or smoke, immedi ately turn the main power switch OFF, then call your service representative. Using the ine in this state might cause a fire or shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the plug so that the machine can be unplugged whenever necessary. + Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front door during the operation. This might result in paper jams. *To avoid danger of ignition, do not use flam- mable aerosol products near the machine. + If the machine will not be used for a pro- longed period of time, for example during the night, turn the main power switch OFF. + There may be an accident or a defect with the hard disk in the machine, causing loss, destruo- tion or alternation of data received or stored on the hard disk. You are recommended not to store data on the hard disk without having copies or print-outs of such data outside. A caution + CANON RECOMMENDS THAT DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCT'S HARD DISK DRIVE BE DUPLICATED OR BACKED UPTO PREVENT ITS LOSS INTHE EVENT OF FAILURE OR OTHER MALFUNCTION OF THE HARD. DISK DRIVE. NEITHER CANON NOR ANY SERVICE PROVIDER WILL BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCT'S HARD DISK DRIVE (SEE THE TERMS OF THE PRODUCT'S LIMITED WARRANTY FOR MORE DETAILS). Handling Precautions 34Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images 32 Using your Scanner to reproduce certain documents, and the printing and use of such reproduc- tions, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these document is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain of the legality of using your Scanner to reproduce any particular document, and/or the printing and use of such reproductions, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance. @ Paper money @ Travelers Cheques @ Money Orders ‘@ Food Stamps © Certificates of Deposit @ Passports ‘@ Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) @ immigration Papers @ Identifying badges or insignias @ Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) ‘@ Selective Service or draft papers ‘@ Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness © Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies @ Stock Certificates ‘@ Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title © Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned ImagesWhat the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do Most operations for using this machine are done from the touch panel display. By pressing the keys following the messages in the touch panel display, you can utilize the functions of this machine. Various Kinds of Copies Basic Features Screen ‘The screen below, which appears when the machine is ready to make copies, is called the Basic Features screen. 100% ___Auto Job/Print monitor area isplays the current status of the copy job or other functions. Press to'select the paper and the feeding posi- Press to make copies at a different copy ratio. tion of the paper. (See “Selecting the Copy Pa- (See “Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Rait)," on per Size (Paper Salect),” on p. 2-9.) p. 2-16.) ageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 33Fisher Press to select or cancel Collate, Group, ot Staple collate modes. (See ‘Collating Copies (Frisher,* on p. 2-48.) When you select the [Collate] key. Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to manually con- trol the copy exposure. Press the [A] key to se- lect or cancel Auto Exposure Control. (See “Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Ex- posure," on p. 2-32.) SCENE i Woe Press to select or cancel the Two-sided mode. You can copy one-sided two-sided originals and facing pages of an original, such as books, on both the front and back sides of the paper, and make one-sided copies from two- sided originals. (See "Two-sided Copying (Two sided Mod," on p. 2-38.) +When you select the [1 »2-Sided] key. fee To Press to copy originals specifying the image quality (text only, text and photo, photo only). You can also select the type of photo (printed image/photo) when you set the photo mode in the Additional Functions beforehand. (See “Selecting Image Quality,” on p. 2-33.) REGeRT PUN Press to select the Special Features mode. (See Chapter 3 “Useful Copy Functions’,) Press to check the printing status, change the printing sequence or cancel printing. (See “Checking and Changing Printing Status," on p. 5-13) 34 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can DoSpecial Features Screen ‘When you press the [Special Features] key in the Basic Features screen, the Special Features screen appears inthe touch panel display. The Special Features screen displays special functions available for copying. In ‘some functions, when a function is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears. To close the Special Features screen and return to the Basic Features screen, press the [Done] key. Pressing the & key attr sel ‘Special Features Screen 1/2 ting a function brings up a help screen with guidance information. [Ivo-neg eee n Press to select or cancel the Two-page Sepa- ration mode. This mode enables you to copy two pages of an opened book onto separate copy sheets. (See "Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy ‘Sheets (Two page Separation,” on p. 3-2.) sertion Press to add covers. Also press to add inser- tion sheets or chapter pages between speci- fied pages. (See “Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (CoverSteetInsetn),” on p. 3-4.) + When you select the [Front Cover] key. tn ‘What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 35Press when making copies of several originals to form a booklet. (See "Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Bocia,” on p. 3-9.) (aire Press to select or cancel the Shift mode. This mode enables you to shift the position of the original image on the copy sheet. (See "Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Sit)," on p.3-16) Rieial| # Interv Press to select or cancel the Transparency interleaving mode. This mode enables you to insert a sheet between each transparency when copying transparencies. (See “Making Copies with Sheets of Paper interleaved be- tween Transparencies (Transparency iteleaving),"on p. 3-13.) cs ve 2 Press to select or cancel the Margin mode. This mode enables you to create margins along the sides of copies. (See ‘Making Copies with Margins (Marg),” on p. 3-18.) 36 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can DoPress to select or cancel the Frame Erase mode. This mode enables you to eliminate dark border areas and lines that appear around original images, or shadows from punched holes. (See “Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase," on p. 3-21.) +When you select the [Original Frame Erase] key. Frame Erase selected 2 7 Frame Erase ° q not selected nage Secaration Press to select or cancel the Image Separation mode. This mode enables you to divide an original into 2 or 4 sections and enlarge each section onto a copy sheet of specified size. (See ‘Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (image Separaton),” on p. 3-35.) When you select the [1 to 2] key. age Press to select or cancel the Image Combina- tion mode. This mode enables you to autorat- ically reduce two, four or eight originals to fit on ‘a one-sided or two-sided copy sheet. (See ‘Re- ducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on Single Copy Sheet (Image Combinaon),” on p. 3- 30,) +When you select the [2 On 1] key. KS o SE Inigrels Press to make copies feeding different-size originals together in one group in the feeder. (See “Feeding Different-size Originals Togeth- erin the Feeder (Diterent Size Cigna), "on p. 3-40.) 11°17" original LTR original Criginal feeding direction es What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 37(Job Baile fe Weary Press to divide the originals into several parts Press to store or recall copy jobs. (See “Stor- and scan them, then subsequently print them _ing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in all together. This is convenient when you can- Memory (Mode Memory,” on p. 3-45.) not load all of the originals that you want to copy at one time. (See "Copying Separately: Set Originals (job Buit)," on p. 3-42.) Press to recall a previously set copy job. (See “Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall,” onp. 3-55.) 38 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can DoSpecial Features Screen 2/2 Press to make copies with the entire black/ Press to copy an original with the image re- white image inverted. (See “inverting Original _peated in the vertical or horizontal direction. Images (NegaPs),” on p. 3-57.) (See “Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeal,” on p. 3-59.) SCENE, cor t gies Press to copy the image of the original re- Press to select or cancel the Sharpness mode. versed as reflection of the mirror. (See “Mak- This mode enables you to make copies of orig- jing Copies with Image Reversed (Minor Image)" inal images with the contrast reproduced more on p. 3-62.) sharply. (See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies (harpness),” on p. 3-64.) R|e| Al What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 39You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience When you press the (a=) Key, the Box selection screen appears. The Mail Box function enables you to store data scanned using this machine, or data sent from a personal computer as it storing documents in binders. The documents (data) stored in abox can be printed whenever necessary. Also, when you set the Merge Doc- uments mode, you can print documents stored separately together as one document. 100 boxes a= copare Sate, Cel ning By storing a password, you can print data without other people ‘observing it. You can print data whenever desired, with the settings necessary. © weortant + Each box can store upto 100 items of document or image data. + You can store a total of upto 1,000 items of dacument or image dat, or up to 3,700 pages (LTR size Canon Standard Chart) of document or image data, in all boxes. Depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used, itmay not be possible to attain the above values in some cases. @ NOTE + For details on how to use the Mail Box, see Chapter 4 “Using the Mail Box Functions”. 40 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can DoBox Selection Screen You can store a name of a box or a password in the Mall Box Settings of the Additional Func- tions. (See “Setting Speciica- tions of the Mail Box Function (Mal Bo Stings," on p. 6-45.) Bren) Ly Select a box Document Selection Screen Gio o Originals scanned in the same way as a Copy function, or doc- uments sent from a personal ‘computer are stored in a box. Select a document and Fe y - Printing Screen ‘Scanning Screen [Eas ame Gee] a oe : ert ‘ia les 100% tim o Cree Weict rococo ae ar Jie. Hf io, Li wits sti Sree noe Prints documents stored in a box. When you ‘You can set various settings when scanning press the [Change P Settings] key, you can originals. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” ‘change the print settings. (See “Printing Doc- onp. 4-2) uments Stored in the Box,” on p. 4-5.) g a Orey What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do aYou can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs System Monitor Screen By using the System Monitor screen, you can check the status of a printing document, cancel printing, or spec- ity the printing priority. og a @ NOTE Shai soy ser SMe BE == Sain 9 mau Bein 0 Baur DB + For a description of functions, see Chapter 5 “Printing Efficiently’ “The status of each icon displayed in the screen are as follows: Bi : Copy job Error Printer job Paper jam Box job BB Add toner When you press the [Secured Print] key, you can print the document sent from a computer with a password. To print the document with a Password, you need to enter that password. AS these documents will not be printed unless the password is entered, you can print classified documents preventing other people from ob- serving them. (See ‘Printing Secured Docu- ments," on p. 5-20.) When you press the [Print Next] key, you can change the printing order of the selected docu- ment to be printed after the current print job completed. (See “Priority Printing,” on p. 5-16.) 42 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can DoSetting the Specifications According to the Method of Use Additional Functions Screen When you press the “e) Key, the Additional Functions screen appears in the touch panel display. With Ad- ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions. Using the Touch Panel Display 1-9 A 1. Before You Start Using This Machine1 Before You Start Using This Machine Touch Panel Key Display ‘When you press a key displayed on the screen, the key is highlighted and the corresponding function (mode) is set. Some keys may not be highlighted even when that function (mode) is set. Acaution + Press the touch panel keys gently with a finger. Do not press the touch panel with a pencil, ball- point pen, or other sharp objects. Such sharp objects can scratch the surface of the touch panel or break it. @ NOTE + Belore using the touch panel, peel off the protective fm from the display. When you set a certain function (mode), the characters on some keys may become difficult to see. You cannot press these keys displayed in this way, which means that you cannot set these functions in combination with the presently set function (mode). Presently set function a yor Functions that cannotbe setin combination I with the presently set function Functions that can be set in combination with the presently set function Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel Ifthe touch panel display is hard to view, use the display contrast dial on the control panel to adjust the brightness. To make the touch panel brighter, turn the dial counter-clockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial clockwise. 1-10 Using the Touch Panel Display/ Placing Originals Set the originals in one of the following places, depending on the size and type that you want to print and the settings that you have programed. © Platen glass Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, originals on heavy paper, lightweight paper, and transparencies. (@ Feeder Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the "% key, and the machine automatically scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided image data iginal has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, set the Job Build mode. (See “Copying Separately-Set Originals (hb Suit,” on p. 3-42, and “Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build,” on p. 4-43.) Placing Originals. 1-11 1 Before You Start Using This Machine1 Before You Start Using This Machine ; Orientation of Originals You can place originals vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass or the feeder. @ NOTE + Ifthe top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass, prints may not be made correctly depending on the mode you have set. + LTAY STMTsize originals can be placed vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for hori- ontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that for vertically placed originals. You can place origi- rnals horizontally when printing with Preset Zoom mode, such as LTR» 11°x17”. (Horizontally placed LTA/ ‘STMTsize originals are referred to as °LTRR/ STMTR’:) + 11"177/ LGL-size originals must be placed horizontally [Platen gl 8] Place he orignal face ou, Place the orignal face coun Vertical placement Horizontal placement q LTS Vertical placement Horizontal placement 1-12 Placing OriginalsPlacing an Original on the Platen Glass You should use the platen glass when scanning books, originals on heavy or lightweight paper, transparencies etc., into memory. 1 Littup the feeder. © iwrortant + Liftup the feeder about 11-778" (0 om), so thatthe S-shaped sensor detaches from the feeder. Other- Wise, the size of originals may not be detected cor- rectly. + Return the original supply tray to its original posi- tion if the original supply tray is pulled up. 2 Place your original. The surface that you want to scan into memory must be placed face down. Align the corner of the original with the top left corner of the platen glass. @ NOTE + Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way. + When enlarging LTA/ STMT size originals to 11°x17/LGL-size paper, place the original hor- zontaly on the platen glass and align it with the LTRR or STMTR marks. + When copying STMsize original using the platen glass, you need to set the “LTRR/STMT Original Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distin- {guishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on p6-16) Placing Originals 1413 A 1 Before You Start Using This Machine1 Before You Start Using This Machine 3 Gentty lower the feeder. Accaution Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in personal injury. + Do not press down the feeder hard when using the platen glass to scan thick books. This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury. @ NOTE + When placing originals on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected after the feeder has been lowered. Be sure to lower the feeder before copy- ing. + Postcards cannot be detected, Follow the instruc- tions on the display which appears alter pressing the “© key and specity the original size, or select the paper manually. + Remove the original from the platen glass when ‘scanning is completed. 1-14 Placing Originals, {inx7}Placing Originals in the Feeder Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the “ key, and the machine automatically scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically scanned as two-sided image data. You can place the following originals in the original supply tray: + Weight 218 to 32-Ib bond (50 to 128 g/m?) + Size :11"%17 LGU LTR/ LTRR/ STMT + Tray capacity 100 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m*)) © imrortant + Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder: + Originals with tears or large binding holes - Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds = Clipped or stapled originals ~ Carbon-backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly «= Transparencies and other highly transparent originals + Check the condition of originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times. Originals which have ‘been fed through the feeder 30 times can become folded or wrinkled and might not be fed smoothly. + Ifthe feeder rollers are soiled from scanning an original written with pencil, perform the Feeder Cleaning. (See “Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Foeder Cleaning), "on p. 6-30.) € NOTE + Place the original as far as it will go untl the original set indicator is lit 1. Adjust the slide guides to ft the size of the originals. Ss Placing Originals. 1-15 1 Before You Start Using This Machine1 Before You Start Using This Machine 2. Neatly place your originals face up in the nal supply tra © important + Do not add or remove originals while the originals are being scanned. @ NOTE + Wen enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to 11°x177/ LGL-size paper, place your originals hor- zontally. + You can place diferent size originals (i.e. LTR and 11°17", STMT and LTAA) together in one group in the feeder when you set the Different Size Orig- inals mode. (See ‘Feeding Ditfeent-size Orig rnals Together in the Feeder (ier Sie rgral)"on p.3-40) +The scanned originals are output face down to the original output area. When scanning is completed, remove trie original ‘sequentially from the original output area to avoid paper jams. Original output area —— 146 Placing OriginalsPaper types available for this machine are as follows: When you store the paper type loaded in the paper drawers of this machine, the type of paper which can be set is indicated by the icons. (See “Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,” on p.6-12) Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place) Paper Type Paper drawer 1,2 | Paper drawer 3, 4| Stack bypass | Paper Deck Pain ** oO ° of ° ° Heavy ** D ° x ° ° Recycled *. Ba O° Oo Oo oO Color™ ° onm ° ° Letterhead **** ° oO ° Oo Tracing Paper) |x x 3 x Transparency # x x Oo x Labels FD x x O° x Hole Punch*™* BJ 3 ° 0 ° Bond * Bp ° ° ° ° © weortant “1 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, and 3-Hole Punch papers are from 17-b to 24-lb bond (64 g/m? to 90 gim?). “2 Heavy papers trom 25-o bond to 110-b index (91 g/m? t 200 gin?) *3 Pre-printed papers with logos or patterns. “4 When copying on Letterhead or 3-Hole Punch papers, we recommend that you set the Image Orienta- tion Print to "On in the Adkitional Functions. (See “Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Of, on 2.637) “6 The S-Hole Punch papers can only be set vertically (LTR). Set the papers withthe holes onthe let side ‘when loading inthe paper drawers. When loading inthe stack bypass or the paper deck, set the papers withthe holes on the right sido. Available Paper Stock 1-17 1 Before You Start Using This MachineVv 1 Before You Start Using This Machine Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place) Paper Size {Length x Wieth| Paper drawer 1,2| Paper drawer 3, 4| Stack bypass | Paper Deck mare [iter x ° ° x LGL B12" x14" x ° ° x LTR 1x82" ° ° ° ° TAR | etx" x 3 ° x STMTR [5-12 x61/2" x ° ° x (x57 10 5 Free Size | {Se yir x x ° x @ NOTE 1-18 + For details on how to load paper, see the following pages: Paper drawer 1 to 4: Loading Paper (See p. 7-2.) Paper Deck: Loading Paper in the Paper Deck (See p. 9-4.) ‘Stack bypass: Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass (See p. 2-12.) Available Paper StockBasic Copying This chapter describes the basic copy functions. Flow of Copy Operations ...........eeeeeeceee pepe cee BB Canceling a Copy Job. ...... eee eeveeeeeee eee eee certs ce BT Canceling from the Touch Panel Display |... oe cee BT Canceling with the "5 key : Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Selec)... ‘Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) ..... Manual Paper Selection : Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass. . Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . Enlarging! Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom). . Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . 2-20 Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image) ...... 2.22 Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) cee 228 Enlarging/Reducing Originals with ony Ratios Set Independent forXandY. ‘Axes (XY Zoom). . ; . ween 228 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (ony ern 282 Adjusting Copy Exposure........ 2:32 Selecting Image Quality. 2:33 ‘Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality Doreen ree 285 12.36 Entering the Copy Quantity ceeeeeee ‘Specifying the Required Number of Copies... Changing the Copy Quantity . Two-sided Copying (Tworsited Mode). eee Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (192-Sided) 2:38 237 Making Two-sided Copies trom Two-sided Originals (2b2-Sided) 2 240 Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b1-Sided) . .- wee 248 Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book b2-Sided). . . 2-45 24 A 2 Basic CopyingVv 2. Basic Copying 2. Basic Copying ee 22 Coltating Copies (Fisher) 160000 : Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample S8)....--- see eeeeeeee Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Seting Contirmaton} ‘Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Seting Cenfmaton'Cancel) 2-48 = 254 = 256 = 257Flow of Copy Operations This section describes the flow of basic copy operations. @ NOTE + For details on the following items, see the indicated pages. = Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.) ~ Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.) + Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.) 1 Press the [==] key. @ NOTE + Ifthe message “You must insert a control card.” appears, insert a Control Card, (See "Opera- tions before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions,” onp. 10-2) + Ifthe message ‘Enter the Department ID and Pass- word using the numeric keys.” appears, enter the Department ID and Password. (See “Operations atter Turning the Power ON,”on p. 10-4.) Senso, ee Flow of Copy Operations 23 2. Basic CopyingW 2. Basic Copying 2. Place your originals. (See “Placing Originals," on p. 1-11.) @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is set to "On’, the Collate mode or the Orfset Collate mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/ Of,” onp. 6-36) 3. set the copy mode in the Basic Features screen. (See Chapter 2 “Basic Copying") @ NOTE + In the Basic Features screen, you can select the copy paper size, set exposure, image quality, copy ratio, and two-sided mode, and select the desired collating function. 4. set the copy mode in the Special Features screen, You can continue setting other available modes. (See Chapter 3 “Useful Copy Functions") @ NOTE + The Special Features screen is divided into two soreens. Press the [¥] or [a)key to seloct the desired mode. 5 Enter the copy quantity. (See “Entering the Copy Quantiy,"on p. 2-36.) | 2-4 Flow of Copy Operations6 Press the “© key. lt there is a current job, the machine scans the original, then waits to print i Printing starts when the current job is completed. © wrortant + You cannot change copy settings such as the copy quantity, copy paper size and copy ratio during copying. @ NOTE + When scanning is completed, remove the original @When the screen on the right appears: Press the “key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. @When you want to copy a different original while copying: You can set the next job while copying. (See "Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy),”on p. 5-7.) @ When you want to stop copy job before it is completed, press the “ key. (See “Canceling a Copy Job,"on p. 2-7.) & NOTE + After you have pressed the "> key, several copies may be output from the machine. + You can stop copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See "Checking and Changing Printing Sta- tus/"on p. 5-13.) CC Doxpiment) ke | Flow of Copy Operations 25 A 2 Basic CopyingVv 2. Basic Copying @When you want to interrupt a copy job: To interrupt a copy job when you need to make cue priority copies, press the "25 key. (See “Inter- ® OO@ rupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies sete Aterupt Mode),"on p. 5-3.) ONOIO) g LOO q 7 when the copy has been made, remove It from the tray. @ NOTE + Ifthe optional Control Card is attached, remove the Control Card. (See ‘Operations atter Using Copy or ‘Mail Box Functions," on p. 10-3.) + If you have set Department ID Management, press the ® key. (See "Operations after Using Copy Functions,” on p. 10-5.) 2-6 Flow of Copy OperationsCanceling a Copy Job @ NOTE + You can also cancel the copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See “Checking and Changing Printing Status,"on p. 5-13.) Canceling from the Touch Panel Display 1 Press the [Cancel] key on the right screen which appears while the machine is waiting to print the document. ‘The machine stops copying. @ NOTE + When you canceled a job during scanning, remove the original ofthat job. Canceling with the “> Key 1 Press the “ key. @ NOTE + When canceling a job which is being printed, press the [Cancel] key on the touch panel which appears during printing. 2 select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press the [Cancel] key. ‘The selected job is canceled. @ NOTE + You cannot cance! mute jobs. + When canceling mutiple jabs, select and cancel the jobs in turn Fo Il vse tener Canceling a Copy Job 27 A 2. Basic CopyingWw 2 Basic Copying ‘ete cay Jb you wnt to eel. 3 Press the [Done] key. 2-8 Canceling a Copy JobSelecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) @ NOTE + When copying an original onto the same paper size at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may bbe cut slightly on the copy. For details of the size of the non-image areas, see ‘Non-image areas" in the “Specifications,” on p. 17-3. + If you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire original image is reproduced on the copy paper without its periphery being cut oft. (See "Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image),” on p. 2-22.) Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) @ NOTE + "Auto" is the Standard mode setting. 1 Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key. ao _ an 2 Setect the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key. Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Sele!) a | ; 29 a 2 Basic CopyingVv 2 Basic Copying The screen on the right appears. ay To Oey. a 100% B1TRO 1 ane 3 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. © weortant Inthe Automatic Paper Selection mode, combined use with the Auto Copy Rat, XY Auto Copy Ratio, ‘Memory Collating, Memory Grouping, Sadale Stitch, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat (Auto) modes cannot be set. + You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection mode when you set the Ditferent Size Originals mode in combination with the Shit mode or the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. + You cannot use Automatic Paper Selection when copying the following types of originals. Copy these using Manual Paper Selection. - Non-standard size originals ~ Highly transparent originals such as transparencies - Originals with an extremely dark background - Originals smatter than STMT in size Manual Paper Selection You can make copies after selecting the paper size and type (colored paper, recycled paper, etc.) loaded in the paper drawer. 1 Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key. @ NOTE + "Auto" is the Standard mode setting. 240 Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Set2 select the desired paper size, and press the Soe [Done] key. crag (Oe sf wok oO @ NOTE ia Se +The paper icon (in he display indicates that the a er is loaded vertically, and the icon ) indicates pape I 0 = fee oO that the paper is loaded horizontally in the paper drawers. Paper sizes with the suffix “R" (such as sucawaes otra} [BUR LTRA) indicate paper placed in the paper drawer or =] the stack bypass horizontally. —= + The paper sizes are displayed inthe order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers. + The paper sizes which are loaded in the paper drawers are shown in the display. + The type of paper (color, recycled) loaded in the paper drawers can be indicated by the icons. (See “identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,” on p.6-12) ‘The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected paper size is displayed. fy a es oy sie 3 > Proceed to make copies in the usual wa & NOTE + You can cancel the mode by pressing the (3 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Selec) 21 A 2 Basic CopyingwW 2 Basic Copying Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass ‘When making copies on transparencies or non-standard size paper stock, place the paper stock in the stack bypass. The following two kinds of paper can be copied using the stack bypass. @ Standard Size You can place standard inch paper, and A or B series paper. @ Free Size You can’place non-standard size (4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)) paper. © iweortant + Note the following points when using the stack bypass. + Copy quantity: 1 to about 50 sheets (stack about 3/16" (5 mm) high) + Paper size: 4°x5-7/8" to 11°-5/8°x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm) = Paper weight: 17-1b bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m?) ~ Curl down paper before use. (Curting amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm.)) There are some types of paper stock which may meet the above specications but cannot be fed in the stack bypass. «Place STMTsize paper horizontally the stack bypass. +o not set diferent size paper at the same time. + When you set ee-size paper, combined use wih the Auto Copy Ratio, Entre Image, Staple, Hole Punch, 1¥2-Sided, 2>2-Sided, Bookr2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover’Sheet Insertion, Shit, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. @ NOTE + When copying the following originals, you cannot use Automatic Paper Selection. Use Manual Paper Selection with these types of paper. ~ Highly transparent originals such as transparencies - Originals with an extremely dark background 1 open the stack bypass. @ Note + Ifthe paper you want to specityis already in the stack bypass, press the [Paper Select key, then speeily the desired paper. + ifthe paper loaded in the stack bypass isnot the paper which you want to specily, check whether or ‘ot there isa curent job ora reserved job. (See “Checking and Changing Printing Status,” on p.5-13) ~ If there is @ curent/ reserved job reserve a change for the stack bypass. (See "Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jabs,"on 5-10) 2-12 — Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass2 Adjust the slide guides to the size of the paper. When feeding large-size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray. 3 Place the paper in the stack bypass. Align the required number of sheets of paper with the slide guides. The surface that you want to copy on (opened surface) must be placed face up. Insert the paper into the machine unti it stops. The screen of step 4 appears in the display. —— 213 Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2 Basic Copying4. Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. =e @ iweortant amy (FeO) O) Be + Set the paper size to the same size as the paper TRO] INTE] Oo placed on the stack bypass. + When placing paper other than a standard size, ross the [Free Size] key. @ NOTE + To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B- size) key. 2 . If the screen on the right is displayed, adjust the a e width of the slide guides to match the paper size. ‘he sori ce r,t contre to 3 ‘he puaeo wu cocfy he Sls aah 2 3 & a 5 select the type of paper (Plain, Heavy, etc.), eae and press the [OK] key. = © weortant fer Oller : ee ‘Select the correct paper type to avoid a paper jam. a F a @ NOTE + For details of paper types, see "Available Paper es 5 Stock," on p. 1-17. Sax — 2-14 — Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass6 Press the [Done] key. Paper size loaded @ Nore presently + When you press the [StackBypass Setting] key, the Paper size screen returns to the Manual Paper Select soraen selected (on step 4. You can set the paper size again. [For mc Ser a ranean) as. Ean moi eek fixe fsa oO 7 Place your originals and program the copy set- oa a 100%_ LTR D NOTE sect @ NO Pale, pe f " + When there is no reserved job, continue the proce- dure trom step 2. cif ero f pe | = 8 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + You can cancel the mode by pressing the (35 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) ss Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-45 2. Basic CopyingChanging the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to standard paper size. © [Reduce] © [Enlarge] LGL -> LTR (78 %) Maximum ratio (400%) 11"%17" 5 LGL, 11°x15" LTR (73 %) STMT = 11"x17" (200 %) 11x17" > LTR (64 %) LTR 11°17" (129%) 11°17" > STMT (50 %) LGL— 11°x17" (121 %) Minimum ratio (25%) *Only on the platen glass © irortant * Place your originals horizontally in following cases: ~ When enlarging LTR-size originals to 11°x17’/ LGL-size paper. - When enlarging STMT-size originals tot 1"x17"-size paper. + When reducing 11°17 LGL-size originals to LTR-size with Image Orientation Priority set to *Ot’, select LTAR-size paper. @ NOTE + Placing an original horizontally means setting with the longer side of the original sideways. 1 Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key. @ NOTE + *Auto"is the Standard mode setting. 2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key. 2-16 Changing the Copy Ratio {Copy Rato)3 Press the [Copy Ratio} key. 1 SB LGL © 4 To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge, Bea select an enlargement ratio. ae (ae | ro RT| cs-cor || 2b Fir Soran — | + |e cm Pe em (ume zat] lee rer 5. Press the {Done} key. Ra ee a TH Ca) a oe | — ae) | Ge nf [— | J om Se [open Leen — The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected copy ratio is displayed. = mon TTR O Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2417 2 Basic Copying6 proceed to make copies in the us @ NOTE I way. + To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + You can cancel the mode by pressing the (2) key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. Copy % —_ from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. 8 3 Original 3 a iw cry GOOG CITY 1 Ptace your originals and press the [Copy Ratio] key. Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and 2 Enter the copy ratio with the [-] or [4] key or the Numeric keys ((@)-(2)) in 1% increments. E NOTE + Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys (®-®), you can change the entered values with the (-] and [+] keys. + Ifyou make a mistake when entering values, press the & key, and enter the correct value. 2-18 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) (ay ST Ta ay Te ou Tok (Soom eee Boe nT So So sseom__| 20% Hy =] + [ccm Spee azo oe ee3 Press the [Done] key. @ wor co + Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range, a 7 TET wt 56 value will appear on the screen. Bean The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected copy ratio is displayed. = 120% B1TR Oo | 4. Proceed to make copies in the usual way. & NOTE + To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + You can cancel the mode by pressing the ¢25 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy aio) 2-19 2. Basic CopyingVv 2 Basic Copying Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) ‘The machine automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio based on the size of the originals and the selected paper. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. Original Copy © important + You cannot use the Auto mode with Automatic Paper Selection + You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom Designation modes. + To.use the Auto mode, your originals must conform toa standard paper size. & NOTE + Hfan error occurs between the Auto copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See “Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Oceur,"on p. 6-30.) + The paper sizes that can be used with Auto are 11°x17"/ LGL/ LTRY LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However, when copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the "LTRA/STMT Original Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See ‘Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals," on p.6-16) als and press the [Paper 1. Place your ori Select] key. 2-20 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)2 select the paper size, and press the [Done] Fi WRT Lr key. ‘a io @ NOTE i oon A + Selecta paper size other than ‘Auto’. When you d select the [Auto] key, the paper loaded in the paper be drawer 1 will be selected. a ae 7 =u, =] [tm mt 3 Press the {Copy Ratio] key. 2. Basic Copying 4. Press the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key. am ‘ox Tir THC UOT The som 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Auto] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ¢ key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) + ifthe original was placed on the platen giass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, pro- vided that the original size can be detected. + Ifthe orignal was placed inthe feeder, the 200m ratio appears wien the “@) key is pressed. + The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%, a Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy ato) 2-21vv 2 Basic Copying Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image) When copying an original onto the same size of paper at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may be cut slightly on the copy. However, if you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire image is reproduced on the copy without its periphery being cut off. © important + In the Entre Image mode, combined use with the Booklet, Frame Erase, image Combination, Image Sep- aration, Image Repeat, and Miror Image modes cannot be set. 1 Place your originals and press the [Copy Ratio] key. 2 Press the [Entire Image] key, and press the [Done] key. 7 aOR | TED ‘ao in| Tae rb Te ao Ir 3 > Proceed to make copies in the usual way. ing, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Entire Image] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the @} key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 2-22 — Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)Calculating the Copy Rai Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) Based on the Original and Copy You can change the copy ratio by specifying the original size and paper size in inches. The following two Zoom Program modes are available. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. @ Making copies with the same XY copy ratio (Zoom) Designate the same copy ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions. Original x (100 mm) Copy X=5-7/8" (150 mm) @ Making copies with different XY copy ratios (XY Zoom) Designate different copy ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions. Original | ‘Yod-9/4" (120 mm) (100 mm) @ NOTE ‘Copy Y¥=5-1/2" (140 mm) X-3-1/8" (80 mm) + The designated sizes are converted to the copy ratio (%) as follows: = copy ratio (%) = (copy size + original size) x 100 ‘Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Rato) 2-23 A 2 Basic CopyingMaking Copies with the Same XY Copy Ratio (Zoom) 1 Place your originals and press the [Copy 2 Basic Copying a Ratio] key. 2. Press the [Other Zoom] key. a Tam) [eb (SER Pox HHS ate hr x (ur [Jaro ils worn eee eo) eset 3. Press the [Zoom Program] key. 2-24 — Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Rati)4. Press the [Original Size) key and enter the original size, then press the [Copy Size] key and enter the copy size. Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (© -@) and the key on the contro! panel. + It you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the values again. + Ifyou want fo enter values in milimeters, press the fmm] key. + For details on how to enter the values in inches, 880 “Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8. + To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction (09) and the vertical direction (¥) independent, press the [XY Zoom] key. + Ifthe zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message tell- ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. If tis more than 400%, a message telling ‘you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear. 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. + To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio}, (Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the #2 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies with Different XY Copy Ratios (XY Zoom) 1 Place your originals and press the [Copy Ratio] key. Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2:25 2 Basic Copying2 Basic Copying y 2 Press the [Other Zoom] key. [Ey ately wey Teco | [oo (eeeme Tee | cee | oe Me ose vixvcre| | | | 12x cmon se [oan LT som — I gse a) syste vortr 3 Press the [Zoom Program] key. 4 Press the [XY Zoom] key. 2-26 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)5 ross the [x1 (horizontal direction) key and the IY] (vertical direction) keys for both the origi nal size and the copy size, and enter each value for X and Y. @ NOTE + When entering values in milimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (@-@) and the & key on the ‘contro panel. + It you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor- rect values, + If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the Imm key. + For details on how to enter the values in inches, 896 “Setting n Inches," on p. 10-8. + To set he same values for the X and V axes, press the (Zoom) key + if the zoom rato is less than 25%, a message tell- ing you that the ratio wil be aajusted to 25% will -appear.Ifit is more than 400%, a message telling {you thatthe ratio wil be adjusted to 400% il 2 Basic Copying appear. 6 Enter ail the values, and press the [OK] key. SS ard ale Raa the usual way. 7 Proceed to make copies @ NOTE + Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. + To return the copy ratio to 100%, pross the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], (Other Zoom], [Zoom Program, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the °=) key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) _—_—— Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Rao) 2.272. Basic Copying " Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Indepen- dently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can make enlarged or reduced copies with different XY copy ratios. The following two XY Zoom modes are available. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. ‘@ Manually specifying the copy ratio (XY Zoom) ‘You can manually specify the XY copy ratios in 1% increments. Original Enlarging and reducing with different XY copy ratios cy @ NOTE + if you set the copy rato withthe XY Zoom mode, the copy image computed from the original size, copy ratio etc, is automaticaly rotated and copied to match the paper. 2:28 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)© Automatically specifying the copy ratio (Auto XY Zoom) The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper. Original Copy LTRR selected 2 2 a = 3 © important “ + You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. To ‘make copies, specity the copy ratio. @ NOTE + Ifyou set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size by Manual Paper Selection. If you do not select the paper size, the copy ratio is automaticaly Set tothe size of the paper set in a certain paper drawer. + If you specity a magntication of smaller than 25%, a message telling you to setit to 25% wil appear. Hit is larger than 400%, a message telling you to set it to 400% wil appear. “If an error occurs between the Auto XY Zoom copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See “Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur,"on p. 6-30.) + When you set the copy ratio in Auto XY Zoom mode, the Auto Orientation will not be performed, 1. Place your originals and press the [Copy Ratio] key. ———— Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy ao) 2-292 Basic Copying 2 Press the [Other Zoom] key. a Tr a TH vmcconn] [100 EE Tex | —coemn_| 20 ST cece] CLE J meaner oy THs aT aan = , 3 > Press the [XY Zoom] key. —- Re calor se 4 Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each value for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + Ifyou select the [Auto XY Zoom key, select a paper size other than the "Auto" Ifyou select the “Auto’, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper in a certain paper drawer. + You can enter the value using the Numeric keys (Q-O) on the contro! pane + If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor- rect values, + Even it you entered the copy ratio with the Numeric keys (®-@), you can change the entered values with the [-] and [+] keys. + Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. [Ree on 2-30 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected copy ratio is displayed. € NOTE + When you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key in the fol- lowing cases, X: Auto% and Y: Auto% are displayed as the copy ratios on the Basic Features screen. = When the original is placed in the feeder. - When the original whose size cannot be detected is placed on the platen glass. 5 proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE aie | ee sting | a + Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. + To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio}, [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the @=) key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Rat) 2-31 2 Basic Copying2. Basic Copying ¥ Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) You can adjust the exposure and image quality when scanning the original you want to copy. @ NOTE + You can also change the exposure during printing. (See “Changing the Exposure During Printing,“on p52) Adjusting Copy Exposure ‘You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original. 1 Place your originals and press the [Light] or aT 100% SLTRO [Dark] key. @ NOTE “Move the inclcator above the [Light] and [Dark} keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to the right to make the exposure darker. isi il 2 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + You can cancel the mode by pressing the £2 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 2:32 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)Selecting Image Quality You can adjust image quality to the level | best suited to the quality of text or photo originals, The following three modes are available for adjusting image quality Text mode Text/Photo mode Photo mode RES@RT PLAN yrs teer ope see er fey ninared ‘nemo cstineg See RES@RT PLAN @ Text mode This mode is best suited for making copies from text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be copied clearly. @ Text/Photo mode This mode is best suited for making © Photo mode copies from originals containing both text and photos. This mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing half-tones (i.e. p © meortant + If you make copies of an original containing halt-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo rinted photos). ‘mode, moiré may occur. f this happens, you can soften this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See “Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Stapress),"on p. 3-64.) + Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set ‘mode is canceled. @ NOTE + When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the exposure can be adjusted only by Man- ual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be selected. + When the “Photo Mode" of Copy Settings is “On’, you can select printed image or photo after pressing the [0] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function, p. 6-40.) + Ifthe original is a transpareney, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the ‘most appropriate level ——— ‘Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 233 2 Basic CopyingWw 2 Basic Copying 1 Place your original and press the [("]] key. mm 100%. BLIR O 2 select the type of original (Text, TextiPhoto, ar a Photo). its, 100% 3 LIR OD When the “Photo Mode" of Copy Settings is set to “On’, you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo] key, (See ‘Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function,” on p. 6-40.) 3 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the copy exposure. = 1 %_ BS LTR DO @ NOTE ue Proper Sonct + Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark] a - keys to the left to make the exposure lighter oF to feral the right to make the exposure darker. Fone foes ea [fyter ker 234 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)4 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [A] key. + You can cancel the mode by pressing the £; key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality 1 Place your originats and press the [A] key. The exposure is automatically adjusted to the nt level best suited to the quality of the original 100% 2 LTR O ee fae ot @ NOTE + Ifthe original is a transparency, you may not be - P se A able to use Automatic Exposure Control. f 80, nee eet otc) adjust the exposure using Manual Exposure Con- [spec a trol as 2 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + You can cancel the mode by pressing the = key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-35 2 Basic CopyingVv 2 Basie Copying Entering the Copy Quantity Specifying the Required Number of Co NOTE Up to 999 copies can be set. The maximum number of copies can also be changed. For details, contact ‘your service representative. 1 Press the Numeric keys (@)-@) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 0 899). © ortant + You cannot change the copy quantily during copy- ing. @ NOTE + The maximum copy quantity varies according to the copy job settings. + The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of the touch panel display. 2-36 Entering the Copy Quantity 100%. aria o gChanging the Copy Quantity 1. ress the (6) key to clear the entered number. Then press the Numeric keys (@-@) to enter the copy quantity again (1 to 999). © important + You cannot change the copy quantity during copy- ing RE ce Power @ NOTE + The copy quantity appears inthe upper right side of the touch panel display SS 2.37 Entering the Copy Quantity 2 Basic CopyingWw 2 Basic Copying Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) © important + In the Two-sided Mode, combined use withthe Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, and image Separation modes cannot be set. + In the Book? 2-Sided mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Binding Erase, Different Size Originals, and image Repeat modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set. + Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used fo make two-sided copies, @ NOTE + When copying with Two-sided Mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen {glass or the feeder. + The Two-sided Mode that you have setis displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key in the Basic Features soreen. + Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform tothe following specifications: =Paper size: 11"x17/LGL/LTRY LTAR/ STMTR ~ Paper weight :17-b bond to 110:o index (64 gin? to 200 gyn?) There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to make two-sided copies. Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1>2- Sided) This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from-one-sided originals. Original © important Place the original horizontally when copying originals such as LTAR/ STMTR:size originals. If these origi- nals are placed vertical, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down. € NOTE + Ifthere are an odd number of originals, the back of the last print is left blank. (The machine's counter does not count the blank page as a copy.) + Ifthe originals to be used for the front and back of the copy are of different sizes, the two-sided copy will rnot be performed. These originals wil be printed as one-sided copies of the respective sizes. 2:38 Two-sided Copying (wosided Mode)1 Place your originals and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. 2 Press the [1)2-Sided] key. @When you select the [Option] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation, and press the [Done] key. Ea = yt vont 3 Press the [OK] key. Te-sed weo)Sauct 3 Ts Cnr Too ap bP = oe Two-sided Copying {Two sided Mode) 2-39 2 Basic CopyingThe display returns to the Basic Features screen, re emer and "1>2-Sided’ is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key. 00% Auto 4 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and press the “() key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Moda] and (Cancel keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the 23} key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 2. Basic Copying , Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2>2- Sided) This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make two-sided copies. Original 2-40 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is sett "On’, the Collate mode or the Offset Collate mode is automaticaly set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/ Of," on p. 6-36.) 100% ___Auto a a lea rere come ce 2 Press the [2>2-Sided] key. @When you select the [Option] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation for origi- nal and copy paper, and press the [Done] key. ‘Two-sided Copying Twosided Mode) 241 2 Basic CopyingVv 2 Basic Copying 3 Press the [0K] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and"2b2-Sided” is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key. a 4 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and press the "(key once for each original. When scanning ls completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the 2; key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 2-42 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2>1 Sided) This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make one-sided copies. Original Copy aaaiii Hii © important + Place the original horizontally when copying original such as LTAR/ STMTR-size original. f these origi- znals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down. @ NOTE + When copying two-sided original placed on the platen glass on one side of diferent sheets, set the Job Build mode. (See “Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job But),"on p. 3-42.) 1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is set to “On’, the Collate mode or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate On/ Of,” onp. 6-36) 2 Press the [201-Sided] key. 100% uta 1 ee ised ond Sewct 3 Trai cerry Toole | BP sp» = 1° Two-sided Copying Two-sided Mode) 2-83 A 2. Basic CopyingWhen you press the [Option] key: Select the type of original, and press the [Done] key. 3 Press the (0K) key. Tea TNT ROT are BP ae a seed 2. Basic Copying a } The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and "2)1-Sided" is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key. 1 $0 ane) 4. Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the () key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 2-44 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Made)Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book >2-Sided) This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages or front and back sides of a page in a bound original, such as a book or a magazine. © Left/Right Two-sided Original Copy Cly 1 © Front/Back Two-sided Original © iweortant + Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot place the orignal in the feeder and copy in the Book 2-Sided mode. + When using this feature, select LTR-size paper. + When copying with Front/Back Two-sided, the ront side of he first two-sided page and the back side of the last two-sided page are left blank, The machine's counter does nat count the blank page as a copy. ee Two-sided Copying {Two-sided Mode) 2605 A 2 Basic Copying4 Pro ceed to make copies in the usual way. To scan the next two facing pages, place the original and press the “= key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ky. (The machine returns to the standard mode.) ae owt te cee Bonn gl a ese Storey Dat es. 99 ‘Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) 247 2. Basic CopyingVv 2. Basic Copying Collating Copies (Finisher) ‘The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the copies in various ways by pages or copy sets. The copied papers are output face down, @ When “Collate” Is set: Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and output onto the trays as follows. Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3 Three sets of copies specified =e o eal] NEE © When “Group” Is set: All copies of the same original page are automatically collated and grouped together, and output onto the trays as follows. Grouped Grouped Grouped Grouped Originals copies of page 1 copies of page 2 copies of page 3 copies of page 4 Three sets of copies specified 5 INGA] @ When “Staple” is set: Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, output onto the trays as shown below, and then automatically stapled. ‘When you select the [Corner] (TopLett) key: Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3 Three sets of copies specified Sih 2-48 Collating Copies (Finisher)When you select the [Double] (Left) key: Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3 Three sets of copies specified a When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key: Originals Copy set 1 Three sets of copies specified \ © eortanr YN + [Staple] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option). + You cannot set the Staple mode when copying on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch, + [Saddle Stitch] can only be specitied when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached. + Paper sizes which can be saddle stitched are 11°x17"/ LTAR. + The maximum number of sheets that can be bound at a time is 15. @ NOTE * Place the originals to be finished into a booklet as shown in the illustration above, (See ‘Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Bokt,”on p. 3-9.) + [Saddle Stitch] can only be set when the 1>2-Sided or 2»2-Sided mode is selected. (See "Two-sided Copying (hosed Mote,” on p. 2-38.) @ When “Non-collate” is set (none of the above (Collate, Group or Staple) are set): Originals KS Ee] Copies 2 Basic Copying2. Basic Copying @ When “Hole Punch” is set: Punches 2 or 3 holes in the copied sheets, When you select 11"x17"/ LTR-size paper: Original Sige is] © irortant + [Hole Punch can only be specified when the Finisher Is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B + The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size. = 2holes: LGL/ LTRR = Gholes: 19°x177/ LTA + Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch. @ When “Rotate” is set: When originals of the same size are placed, the pages are aligned and the copy sets are deliv- ered in alternating directions. Original Sib. i © iwrortant + You can only select LTAY LTAR-size paper. + (Rotate) can only be specified when the machine is not equipped with the Finisher (option). © When “Offset” is set: Copies are shifted to the front and back respectively. Original © imortant + [Offset] can only be specified when the machine Is equipped with the Finisher (option. + You cannot select STMTR-size paper. 2:80 Collating Copies (Finisher1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Finisher] key. € NOTE + When Auto Collate is set to "On", the Oitset Collate ‘mode is automatically set at the point when you Place the originals in the feeder. (See “Setting ‘Automatic Collate On/ Oft"on p. 6-36.) 2 Select the desired collate feature, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + When you select the [Staple] key, press the [Next] ey. + The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached. + The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is not attached. + The [Hole Punch] key only appears when a Puncher Unit-B1 Is attached to the Finisher. + The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached. @When you select the [Staple] key: Select the type of stapling ([Corner], [Double], [Saddle Stitch] and the position to be stapled, and press the [OK] key. ©) irorTant The maximum number of papers whiah can be stapled at atime is as follows: = 11°x17LGL/ LTAR : 30 sheets -u7R 50 sheets When you select the [Corner] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT STMTR-size paper cannot be comer-stapled. 100% Auto o | li As" _ Liretres When the Finisher is attached. Foire) Sonat» iste etm Collating Copies Finiser) 251 2. Basic CopyingW 2 Basic Copying When you select the [Double] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. © wportant + LGL/ LTAR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be double- stapled. tm When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key: Press the [Next] key. © irortant + [Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the ‘Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached. “ LGL/LTR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be saddle stitched. @ NoTe 2-52 + You can adjust the sadale stitch position. (See "Changing the Sadale Stitch Position,” on p. 6-82.) Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key. @When you select the [Rotate] key: ‘When the Automatic Paper Selection is set, press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key. € NOTE + Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key in the following cases: ~ Available paper size is selected manually. - Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal and vertical direction. - Drawer Eligibiliy for APS/ADS of the paper draw- ers loaded with available paper size Is set to "On Collating Copies (Finisher) [Stape) Soest he saps posto Bech vaca (Beer {iar aah Steel Soect Be pea 19, Mt 007 ar iat pat act Sa Stace apse ietatetavteglSoeet Po Eira tt (ones tn) [fm CRD Seem@ When you select the (Hole Punch] key: Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets. IMPORTANT + The machine automaticaly selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected ‘paper size. ~ 2 holes: LGL/LTRR B holes: 11°x177LTR + You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper. The display returns to the Basic Features screen and the selected feature is displayed above the [Finisher] key. 100%__Auto os When the Offset Collate is set. the usual way. 3 Proceed to make cop @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and press the “2 key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the 2) key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) a Collating Copies (Frise) 2 Basic Copying 2-53Ww Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) Before making multiple copies, the copying result can be checked using the Sample Set mode. @ NOTE ‘The machine's counter counts the sample print as a print. 1 Place your originals and program the copy set- tings. @ NOTE + The [Sample Set] key is displayed when you set a ‘multiple number of copy sets in the Collate, Staple (or Cover/Sheet Insertion modes. This key is not displayed when you set the Group mode. 2. Basic Copying 2 Press the [Sample Set] key, then press the “© key. ‘Sample Set copying starts and one copy set is made. 2:54 Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) rena rteFnon 100%, BLIRO 3 [iter tonto 1D freeeg Spe St. Suk 0.3 > check the output sheet, and select the [Start Print}, [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key. @ NOTE + To make the remaining copies, press the [Start Print} key. + To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key + To change copy settings, press the [Change Set- tings] key. @ When you select the [Change Settings] key: Change the settings, and press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To change the number of copies, use the Numeric keys (®-O). + To change the exposure, press the [Light] or [Dark] key. + To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy] hey. + To select the copy paper, press the [Paper Select} key. (See “Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Pager Select," on p. 2-9.) + To collate the copied papers, press the (Finisher) key. (See ‘Collating Copies fFinsher,” on p. 2-48.) + To set a margin for binding, press the [Margin] key (See “Making Copies with Margins Magi," on p.3-18) + When you change the copy settings, the machine starts printing from the first set. © To copy another sample set, press the [Sample Set] key. ‘Sample set copying starts and one copy set is made. age the reminrs pret Cir etc sett eect thame Sethe) a (Choe Serra] om 1 yng sao st. = 2. Basic Copying oot :Fineted penta Supe Se Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Se) 2-55When the copy mode settings are selected on the Special Features screen etc., you can check the current settings. 1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the Basic Features screen. The display shows the selected copy mode settings. 2. Basic Copying 2 check the settings, then press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. @ NOTE * When ten or more copy modes have been set, use the ['¥ ]key to bring up the next screen. To return to the previous screen, press the [&\] key. + The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set thelr functions. fystea rt 256 Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confmation)(Setting Confrmation(Cancel} From the Setting Confirmation screen, you can also change or cancel selected functions. 1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the Basic Features screen. ‘The display shows the selected copy mode settings. 100% sitro 5 Pet pa 2. Basic Copying 2. Press the key for the copy mode you want to change or cancel. The copy mode settings screen appears. € NOTE + When ten or more copy modes have been set, use the [7] key to bring up the next screen. To return to the previous screen, press the [4] key. +The [> ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set ther functions. + Keys which do not have the [> ] mark on the bot- ‘om right can be canceled by pressing the keys again. @70 change a mode (example: Sharpness) Perform the same steps as when setting the mode. Change the setting as you desire, then press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Setting Confirmation screen. 100:_Auto settngCoiPootanl Te oe boon 5S onsEw SEE Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Seting Contmion'Canca) 2-57Ww 2 Basic Copying @To cancel a mode Press the [Cancel] key. The display returns to the Setting Confirmation sereen, 3 Press the [Done] key. [inmate oar eee] The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 100k Auto. 2-58 Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Sting Confrmatin/Cancel)Useful Copy Functions ‘This chapter describes more advanced copy functions. ‘Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Soparation) .. we eee ‘Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover!Sheet Insertion) . steno veces 34 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet Boake). 39 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Tansparency hteeaving). oe. ee eee veeeeeeeees ceceeee eee cee BAB Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shit). . +316 Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . eee 318 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erese) 3-21 Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals... . 3:23 Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame. . : ee a2) Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. : cece 3-28 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single coor Sheet (image Combination)... 6. eee sees Gebceeceeusane 3-30 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation) «2... eevee cee cee 3:35 Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Diferent Size Origa)... 3-40 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Buid). . 3-42 Storing/ Recalling Otten Used Copy Setings in Memory eo Oe Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Job . Storing a Memory Key Name . Recalling a Copy Job. wee Erasing a Copy Job....2... 0.06.5 Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)... . . Inverting Original Images (NegaPesi) cee Seen Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeal) 0... .eeeee eee 3-59 Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mir Image) 3-62 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-64 34 3 Useful Copy Functions3> Useful Copy Functions : king Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation) This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper. Original Copy © eortant + In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Binding Erase, Ditferent Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separa- tion, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. «Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy itn the Twwo- page Separation mode. + When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode. (See “Making Two-sided Copies trom Facing Pages in a Book (Book2-Sided),"on p. 2-45.) 1 Place your original on the platen glass and aK press the [Special Features] key. = = 100% _ Six o NOTE. “Seect ge Pie | + If you want to make copies in page order, begin a copying from the first pages and work your way forward. + Place the original face down with the original's top, ‘edge is against the back edge of the platen glass. 2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key. Fae Ie 32 Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy ‘Sheets (Two-page Seperation)3. Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. a aad 4 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the “% key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features}, [Two-page Separation}, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the @; key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy 3-3. ‘Sheets (Iwo;age Separation 3 Useful Copy Functions3 > Useful Copy Functions ae ig Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet insertion) This function enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, inser- tion sheets or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text. In addition, the front and back covers and insertion sheets can also be copied, © important + Inthe Cover/Sheet Insertion mode, combined use with the Group, Ofiset Group, Memory Collating, Mem- ory Grouping, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency interleaving, Image Combina~ tion, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. + Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30 sheets (lor 11°x17"/ LGL/ LTAR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size). @ NOTE + When copying on the front and back covers/ insertion sheets, those sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies. * Chapter pages are included in the count ofthe total number of copies. @ Front Cover ‘Adds a front cover sheet to each set of copies. The cover sheet can also be copied. Originals Copy Printed front cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. @ Back Cover ‘Adds a back cover sheet to each set of copies. The back cover can also be copied. Originals Copy Printed back cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. 34 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cove'heet Insertion)© Sheet Insertion ‘Adds insertion sheets between the pages of copy sets. It is useful when you want to divide your copy sets into different sections with a blank sheet. The insertion sheets can also be copied. Originals Copy REPORT REPORT Printed insertion sheets selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. ‘© Chapter Page ‘Adds chapter pages between the pages of copy sets. Since the chapter page is always copied on ne side, itis useful when you want to divide the copy by chapter. Originals Copy 7 Printed chapter page selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. 1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key. € NOTE + When Auto Collate is set 0 “On’, the Collate mode or the Oftset Collate made is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the Ieeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/ Of"on 2.6-36) Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to. 3-5 Copy Sets (Cover'Snae insertion) 3 Useful Copy FunctionsVv 3. Useful Copy Functions 2 Press the [Cover/Sheet Insertion] key. foto [Sst 3 select the Cover/Sheet insertion feature you want to use, and press the [Next] key. When you select only the [Chapter Page] mode, proceed to step 5. (When you select the [Sheet Insertion] or [Chapter Page] mode.) @ NOTE + You cannot select the (Sheet Insertion] and [Chap- tor Page] modes atthe same time. + You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key again. 4 when copying onto the front cover, back cover or insertion sheet, press the [Printed] key, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE +The dlsplay wil vary depending on the setting in step 3, + The chapter page will always be copied only on cone side. [Geter torneo oe] 36 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover'Sheet Insertion)5 Make the following settings depending on the mode selected. @ NOTE + The display will vary depending on the mode selected. When you select the [Back Cover] key: SSE Select the side to be copied onto, and press the ie rt St aks of [Next] key. @When you select the [Sheet Insertion (Printed)], tise SS [Chapter Page] key: Vine ine rere a. Set all positions where the sheet is to be Sa inserted into the copies, and press the [Next] 2 = key. Specity the sheet insertion positions with the Numeric keys (©-@). @ NOTE + You can insert up to 20 insertion sheets (or chapter pages). + Ifyou want to insert 6 or more sheets, use the [¥] or [a\] keys to scroll to the insertion positions. + You cannot specity the sheet insertion position to the first page. Set the position starting from the second page. + To cancel a speciic sheet insertion page setting, ress the ['¥] or [a] key and press the desired page, then press the & key. When you select the Two-sided Mode: Press the [Option] key. Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pagesto 3-7 Copy Sets (Cover!Shee insertion) A 3 Useful Copy Functions3 > Useful Copy Functions Select the side to be copied onto, and press the [Done] key. Tet! Souct te soe) to be ited am = 6 select the paper source for each insertion sheet, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + Select the same paper size for the front and back cover, insertion sheets (or chapter page.) + The display will vary depending on the mode selected. Fis amt art) Seat arr sare, Ge [aur olf aur oll Bue ol fe de 7 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 8 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the “ key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], (Cover/Sheet Insertion], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the &2} key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) _—_—_——— 3:8 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (CoveShee hserton)Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Bookie!) You can copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies can be easily made into a booklet. Originals Copy 5 When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached, © portant + In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet insertion, Transparency interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Diferent Size Originals, mage Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. + When you place the onginals used in the vertical dlrection horizontally and scan them, the images of the ‘even number pages willbe printed upside down. + Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will oly be folded. 1 Place your originals in the feeder and press 5 the [Special Features] key. 100% __Auto @ NOTE ver Sekt + When Auto Colas ett "On’ the Cole mode El or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off"on 6-96) Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Gockel) 3-9 3 Useful Copy Functions3 Useful Copy Functions ¥ 2 3 3-10 Press the [Booklet] key. Select the original size, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To copy two-sided originals, also press the [2-Sided Original) key. + To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B- size] key. @Wnhen you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of the original, and press the [OK] key. Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) iam a eS] iw ay rin 7 Stari [Stara eye ee4 select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. © iweortant + The paper used for the cover page must be the same size as the other pages. + The paper used for the main text must be from 17lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/n? to 80 g/t). + The paper used for the cover page must not be heavier than 110-Io index (200 g/m). + When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot set the paper used for the main text inthe stack bypass. @ NOTE + To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key. + Insert the paper for the cover page in the stack bypass. + The cover page can only be copied on the front + 11°17 LTRR-size paper can be selected. @When you select the [Add Cover] key: Select the [On] or [Off] key to set whether or not to copy on the cover, and press the [Next] key. Select the type of paper, and press the [Next] key. Press the {OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. oot wus yoo ‘De'sow die of Se ara Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-11 3 > Useful Copy FunctionsW 3. Useful Copy Functions 5 select whether or not to saddle stitch the auhusugeeoea booklet, and press the [OK] key. SEG faassen The display returns to the Special Features screen. © wrortant + The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad- dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. + Wihen the number of sheet exceeds 15, the sta- pling wil not be performed, and the sheets will be output to the tray. @ NOTE + The available number of output sets in the sadale stitching is as follows: = Number of sheets Number of sets 5 25 sels 6-10 15 sets 1115 10 sets + Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded. 6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the B. @ NOTE + When you set the Booklet mode, the Shit mode is automatically set. Ege’ anaes) = so Features screen. eM | 7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the “(key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [Bookie], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You cam also cancel the mode by pressing the ¢=) key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.) — 3412 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booke!)between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving) Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass. The machine automat- ically interleaves a sheet of paper between each transparency. The interleat sheets protect the cop- ied surface of the transparencies. They can also either be printed with the same images as the transparencies or left blank. © Blank interleat sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode. als cb ‘Transparency @ Printed interleat sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mos Originals REPORT Blank interleaf — sheets Copy © portant + In the Transparency interleaving mode, combined use with the Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. Printedinterleat — sheets ~ Transparency + You cannot make more than one set of copies at atime in the Transparency Interleaving mode. + Even if your machine is equipped with the Finisher, you cannot use any of the Finisher modes with the Transparency interleaving mode, @ NOTE + The machine's counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies. Making Copi s h Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleavng} A 3 Useful Copy Functions4 3 > Useful Copy Functions 1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key. @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is set to “On’, the Collate mode or the Otset Collate mode is automaticaly set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See ‘Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off” on P6396) 2 Press the [Transparency interleaving] key. 3 select the size of the transparencies, and press the [Next] key. 100 Auto i eat Ss a Fnoseny wemral Seth toe kesorwey te, Ter any veers esc 2 ue a Gc] 4. solect the size of interleaf sheet, and press the [Next] key. ireonrecy rinse] Sanly Wo pow tae eur OD eX =a Oo i RO) 3-14 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies {TranspatenyItleavrg)5 select whether or not to copy the image onto the interleaf sheet, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen @ NOTE * When copying interleat sheets, those sheets are included in the count ofthe total number of copies. 6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Fesgeregey prerral Some Price o Bak 7 Place the transparency in the stack bypass, and proceed to make copies in the usual way. (See ‘Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass," on p.2-12,) @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, fol low the instructions that appear on the display and press the “@ key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + In the Transparency Interleaving mode, the trans- pparencies are fed from the stack bypass and the interleaf sheets are fed from the paper drawer, + The copies are output withthe copied side face down, with the transparency frst, followed by the intorleat sheet. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features, Mransparency interleaving], and (Cancel) keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing tho key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies 3-15 (Transparency Intrleaving) A 3 > Useful Copy FunctionsWwW 3 Usetul Copy Functions Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (shitt) Makes copies with the entire image shifted to the center or a corner. Original Copy with original image Copy with original image shifted to the center shifted to a comer cb @ NOTE + In the Shift mode, combined use with the Image Repeat and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. + The Shift mode cannot be selected when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with the Automatic Paper Selection. 1 Place your original and press the [Special Fea- tures] key. 2. Press the [Shift] key. 3-16 Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Stit)3 Select the shift direction by using the arrow keys, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features soreen. @ NOTE + "Shift direction” refers not to the direction in which the original is placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, but to the direction of the original viewed when the surface of the original you want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top. 4 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE i= 8 Ereitie E id fl eat fa + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], (Shit, and (Cancel) keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ¢3 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shit) 3417 A 3 Useful Copy FunctionsMaking Copies with Margins (Margin) This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top or bottom to create a margin on print sheets. Use this mode to make copies ready for placement in ring binders. Left margin Right margin Top margin Bottom margin Original selected selected selected selected © iweortant + In the Margin mod, combined use with the Bookiet, mage Repeat, and Miror Image modes cannot be set + When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shited tothe let right, top or bottom by a selected wiath, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to the edge of the sheet, part of that image wil be cut ot 3 > Useful Copy Functions 7 1 Place your original and press the [Special Fea- tures] key. loox_2 tt o 2 Press the [Margin] key. 3-18 Making Copies with Margins (Margin)3 select the type of margin, and press the [Next] key. © iwrortant + Ifyou are using the Margin and Two-sided modes together and copying an original that already has a ‘margin, follow the instructions below: + 192.sided: Set the margin for the back only. - 2>2-sided: You do not need to set tho margin. Pro- ceed to make copies inthe usual way. ~ 20 1-sided! Sot the margin forthe back only. + Ifyou are using the Margin and Two-sided modes together and copying an original that does not have a margin, follow the instructions below: > 1¥2.sided: Set the margin for both the front and back - 2>2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and back. + 2» -sided: Set the margin fr both the front and ack. When you select the [Left Margin] or [Right Mar- ae gin] key: Use the [-] and [+] keys to set the margin for the front and back (0" to 13/16"/ 0 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + If you want to enter values in milimeters, press the [mm] key. + The default setting is 3/8° (10 mm). @When you select the [Top Margin] or [Bottom Margin] key: Use the [-] and [+] keys to set the margin (1/16" to 18/16"/ 1 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + When entering values in milimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (®-®) and the & key on the ‘contro! panel. + Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen, HH Making Copies with Margins (Magn) 3-19 3. Useful Copy Functions3. Useful Copy Functions 4. Press the {Done] key. aie The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), (Margin, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can algo cancel the mode by pressing the @ key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 3-20 Making Copies with Margins (Marin)sing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. The fol- lowing three Frame Erase features are available, © iweortant + Combination ofthese three modes cannot be set. Ifyou select one of these modes, the previously set ‘mode is canceled. © Original Frame Erase Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original is smaller than the selected paper size. ‘A'so creates a blank border around the edge of the print paper. IMPORTANT + In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror image modes cannot be set. Copy (LTR) Original TMT) Original Frame SIMD Erase mode, re) selected 2 Copy (LTR) & Original Frame Erase mode not selected Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Fame Erase) 3-21 3 Useful Copy FunctionsVv 3> Useful Copy Functions @ Book Frame Erase Erases the dark border as well as center and contour lines that appear when copying facing pages in a bound original onto a single print paper. © iwrortant + In the Book Frame Erase, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. Copy Book Frame Erase selected Original Book Frame Erase > not selected @ Binding Erase Erases the shadows that appear in copies from binding holes in originals. © imeortant + in the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use withthe Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Sepa- ration, Booklet, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Miror Image modes cannot be set. + Do not place originals with binding holes inthe feeder, as this may damage the originals. Copy Binding Erase mode selected Original o> Binding Erase > mode not selected 3-22 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Fame Erase)Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals 1 Place your originals and press the [Special oe Features] key. 2 Press the [Frame Erase] key. 3 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key. a ac rom jaa | 4 Select the size of the original, and press the [Next] key. rg Foe Goal Gacy Ow wor Same Ge ee iso @ NOTE a rixi7) fi (SmaTacy + You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only 7a] sie on original sizes shown in the touch panel cisplay. + To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B- size) key. Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (FraneErese) 3-23, 3. Useful Copy Functions3 Usefut Copy Functions 5 set the desired original frame erase width using the [-] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. The value set here is specified uniformly around the original. ‘To set frame erase width values for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the original independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key. @ NOTE + When entering values in milimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (@-@) and the & key on the controt panel. + Ifyou enter @ value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the sereen. + Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys (@ -@), you can change the values withthe Elor fa} key. + Ifyou want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. +The default setting is 1/8" (4 mm). @When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key: Select each side in turn and set the frame erase width using the [-] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. [East Ee [SP RT ve, 78. (re i 6 Press the [Done] key. ‘The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 3-24 Erasing Shadows and Frame 6 from Copies (Frame Erese)7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. € NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the (Special Features}, [Frame Erasel, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the £1 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame 1 Place your originals and press the [Special Features] key. 2 Press the [Frame Erase] key. a 3 Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press aaa the [Next] key. Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-25 3 Useful Copy Functions3 Useful Copy Functions ¥ 4 select the size of the book when opened, and Soy press the [Next] key. : @ NOTE + To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B- size] key. 5 ress each key (“Top”, “Left”, “Center”, “Right”, and “Bottom”) and set the desired book frame erase width using the [-] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. The values set here are specified independently around the original. To set a value uniformly around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once] key. @ NOTE + When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (@-@) and the & key on the control panel. + ityou enter a value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. + Even when you enter the vafues with the Numeric keys (@-@), you can change the values using the for [+] key. + Ifyou want to enter values in millimeters, press the Imm] key. + The defautt settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for “Center” ‘and 1/8" (4 mm) for “Top’, “Left”, “Right” and "Bot tom’ @When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key: Set the desired book frame erase width using the [+] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. ea From Gass) Sect eam wane wa me cae na, f Bern, = 3-26 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. == 7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the (A key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-27 3 Useful Copy Functions ’3 > Useful Copy Functions . Making Copies Erasing ding holes ete. 1 Place your origin press the [Special Features] key. 1oox_21TRo 2. Press the [Frame Erase] key. 3 Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the [Next] key. 4. specity the binding erase feature, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + The position ofthe binding holes refers not to the position in which the original is placed on the platen ‘9lass, but to the position of the binding holes viewed when the surface of the original that you Want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top. Tan are fe rome Pa 3-28 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) -5 set the desired binding erase width using the [+ or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE wa + When entering values in millimeters, ou can use eS the Numeric keys (© -@) and the & key on the control panel. + If you enter a value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. + Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys (®-@), you can change the values using the Ejor fs] key. + Ifyou want fo enter values in milimeters, press the [rar key. + The default setting is 3/4" (18 mm). 6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. foto PM PES 7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, the [Special Features), [Frame Erase], and {Cancel] keys in hat order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ¢} key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-29 3 Useful Copy Functions3. Useful Copy Functions v Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination) This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided originals, or the facing pages of a book to fit on one side or both sides of a selected paper size. © wrortant Inthe Image Combination mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency interleaving, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, Dit ferent Size Originals, Image Separation, Image Repeet, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. + Originals copied in the image Combination made must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Ditlerent Size Originals mode. @ NOTE * The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit on the selected paper size. @20n1 Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet. Copy Originals @40n1 Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet. Originals Copy 330 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)@80n1 Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet. Originals Copy Ea = or 1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key. @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is set t0 °On’, the Collate mode or the Oftset Collate mode is automaticaly set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate On/ Of," ‘on p. 6-36.) 100%__Auto 2 Press the [Image Combination] key. Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image 3-31 Combination} 3 Useful Copy Functions3. select the size of the originals, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + When copying the two-sided original with the Image Combination mode, press the [2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original size, + To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B- size] key. @When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key. Teas Soman) Sant We rarer M9e 4 [fxr] ser Gy TES 3> Useful Copy Functions . 4. select the desired Image Combination feature, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To make a two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy] key. @When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation, and press the [OK] key. eS 3-32 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)@When you select the [Option] key: Select the image order, and press the [Done] key. 20nt 40n1,80n71 5. select the paper size, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. © imeortant + You cannot set Automatic Paper Selection inthe Image Combination mode. @ NOTE +The machine automaticaly selects the copy ratio depending on the selected paper size. 6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen @ NOTE + When you set the Image Combination mode, the ‘Shift mode is automatically set. 3 Useful Copy Functions Tis trated Seat» Bw ik 0. MK oO. Paw oO au 0. Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (image 3-33. Combination)3. Useful Copy Functions ¥ 7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE 3-34 + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the “@ key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ( key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (image Continaton)Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation) This mode automatically divides an original into equal sections and copies each section in enlarged form on a separate sheet. © important + In the Image Separation mode, combined use withthe Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet insertion, Booklet, Transparency interleaving, Frame Erase, Ditferent Size Originals, Image ‘Combination, and image Repeat modes cannot be set. + Originals copied in the Image Separation mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Different ‘Size Originals mode in combination with the Image Separation mode. + Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original inthe feeder and copy itn the Image ‘Separation mode, The following Image Separation features are available: 104, @ NOTE + The enlargement rato is automatically set to match the designated paper size. @1to2 ng an n Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each 10.2, 1 to 4, 2-Sided/ 1 to 2, and 2-Sided/ 1 Divides a one-sided original into two equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as two 1-sided copies or one 2-sided copy. Original Copy en I or @ NOTE + You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature. When placed vertically, each page is divided into upper and lower sections. Divi 1g an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation 3:35 3 Useful Copy FunctionsWV 3° Useful Copy Functions e@1to4 Divides a one-sided original into four equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as four 1-sided copies or two 2-sided copies. Original Copy Pes) or @ NOTE + You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature. 1. Place your originals on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key. 2 Press the [Image Separation] key. 3-36 Dividing an Original into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a ‘Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation)3 solect the desired image Separation feature, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy} key. @When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key: Select the appropriate orientation, and press thom Sareten Saat Be Wor of a Si Go Test te rents ie oF the [OK] key. 4 select the layout for the last original, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + You can reduce the output of pages without images (blank output) by setting the layout of the last origi- a. {[systee vorvtor Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Sectionona 3:37 Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation) 3 Useful Copy Functions3 Useful Copy Functions ¥ @When you select the [Option] key: Specify the image (print) order, and press the [Done} key. Titi Sie te ape ere 1To2 ca Ga Eo (__ ee ee) (tre) Ter = =f 1To4 5 select the paper size, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. © rortant + You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection in the Image Separation mode. @ NOTE +The machine automaticaly selects the copy ratio depending on the selected paper size. ax ea Se oy Bou O Boo ae O 6 Press the (Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 3-38 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation)7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + When there are multiple originals, folow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done) key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [Image Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the é; key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) ——$$ qe i i Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section ona 3-39 ‘Separate Copy Sheet (image Separation) 3 Useful Copy Functions3. Useful Copy Functions uae 2 Feedin Feeder (Different Size Originals) This function enables you to copy different-size originals with the same width or different. nals with different widths, together in one group. © iwrortant + In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Book 2-sided, Two-page Separation, Book- let, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. + All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type). + Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge ofthe feeder when placing diferent-width originals. + Set the different size originals with the combinations as follows. Other combinations may damage the originals 11"x17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTAR. + When you place different-wiath originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass, and as a result, the images may be scanned and copied slantwise, + You cannot select the Shift mode when you set the Automatic Paper Selection in combination with the Dit- ferent Size Originals mode. + You cannot set the Staple mode when placing ciferent-wicth originals. 1 Place your original in the feeder and press the | iia [Special Features] key. 100% ___Auto 1 @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is set to "On’, the Collate mode or the Oiset Collate mode is automaticaly set at the point when you place the originals in the teeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate Or/ Of,” (on p. 6-36.) 2 Press the [Different Size Originals] key. 3-40 Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (ferent Sze Originals)3 select the type of the Different Size Originals, ARSE and press the [OK] key. Pores The display returns to the Special Features screen. @ NOTE + When you set the same-width originals, press the [Same Wath key. «When you set the diferent-width originals, press the [Different Width] key. 4 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 5) Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the “3 key once foreach orignal. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the (Special Features], [Ditferent Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the (2) key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Oierent Size Originals) 3-41 3. Useful Copy Functions3 Useful Copy Functions 7 This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into mul- tiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are cop- ied as one document after all the batches have been scanned. Originals Copies 2 © imortant + You cannot change the copy settings while scanning originals inthe Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original or the desired Finisher mode, +f you place the original inthe feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original ouiput area when scanning is completed. + When you place citferen-size originals in the feeder, set the Ditferent Size Originals mode. @ NOTE + When you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the 1»2-Sided mode before- hand ifthe first batch of originals is one-sided. ifthe first batch is two-sided, set the 2»2-Sided mode beforehand. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of original, + Itis useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See ‘Printing Mult- ‘ple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),"on p. 4-63.) 1 Place your first original and press the [Special Features) key. 100% S 17RD 3-42 ‘Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)2 Press the {Job Bulld] key. 3 press the {Done} key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 4. Press the " (2) key to start scanning the orig- inals. @ NOTE + You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Qual- lity. (See "Adjusting Exposure and image Quality (Copy Expsire,"on p, 2-32.) + You can change the setting ofthe original type (One-sided/ Two-sided). (See “Two-sided Copying (frosted Mod," on. 2-38.) + You can change the number of copy sets. (See GOCE ORI "Entering the Copy Quantity" on p. 2-36.) + To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the “B key. ‘@When scanning Two-sided originals: Press the [2-Sided] key. ran ne gree Sn wee te Start ke, oe BUF Oat nen. Son © important is By + Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Origi- rnal mode according to the type of originals. Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) 3-43, 3 Useful Copy FunctionsVv 3 Useful Copy Functions Select the type of two-sided original, and press the [OK] key. 5 when scanning is completed, set the next nal. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the last original is ‘scanned, then press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [dob Bui) keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the () key, (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 3-44 Copying Separately-Set Originals (lob Bui)ring/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) You can store any possible combination of the Copy functions, up to 9 settings, ina memory key, and name that key. Itis useful when you want to store the Copy functions used frequently. € NOTE +The copy jobs stored in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF. + You can store all functions (modes) except for the Interrupt mode. Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Job 1 Program the copy job that you want to store in the Basic Features or Special Features screen. @ NOTE + Inthe display on the right, the Two-page Separation ‘and Margin modes are set. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 3 Press the [Store/Erase] key. SERRE a Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-45 A 3 Useful Copy Functions> 3 Useful Copy Functions 4. Press the [Store] key. OT SORT aT Hy Tr a Tea 5 select the desired memory key from among memory keys [M1] to [M9], and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + The mode memory key where copy settings are already stored shows a small, black square [Wi in the lower right corner of the key. + Ifyou selected a memory key to which a copy job has already been stored, its settings are displayed. + If there are more stored copy modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the ist using the [¥] or [a] keys. @ If you selected a memory key to which a copy job has not yet been stored: ‘The message to confirm whether or not you want to store the new copy job is displayed. Wo store: Select the [Yes] key. The new copy job is stored to the memory key. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another key. Sor] Sons Ge Sone Bat To Yoo wan To sere te tre 3-46 Storing/ Recalling Otten Used Copy Settings in Memory (Wade Memary)@'f you selected a memory key to which a copy job has already been stored: ‘The message to confirm that you want to replace the old copy job settings with the new copy jab settings is displayed, To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new copy job To cancel storing: ‘Select the [No] key, then select another mem- ory key. When storing is completed, the message “Stored in memory.” appears for about two seconds. 6 when the copy settings are stored, the mem- cory key storing the copy job is highlighted and the stored settings are displayed. (oa) Sec tw Sara tn 3870 vat oes Te BVT fete meter 7 Press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. 100s_Auto 1 ies ancy Pee te ay te i Oe Toe ont Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memon) 3-47 A 3 Useful Copy Functionsvv 3. Useful Copy Functions 8 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Storing a Memory Key Name 1 Press the [Special Features] key. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 3-48 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)3. Press the [store/Erase] key. 4 Press the [Store Name] key. (lena sont ore 5 select the memory key ([M1] to [Mo}) for which you want to assign a name, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE +The mode memory key where copy settings are already stored shows a small, black square [1] in the lower right corner of the key. + Ifyou selected a memory key fo which a copy job has already been stored, its settings are displayed. 6 Enter the new name, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + For details on how to enter characters on the touch panel display, see “Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display" on p. 10-6. + The maximum number of characters you can assign for the name ts 10. + Ifyou press the [OK] key without any characters entered, the name of the memory key will revert ‘back tots default setting, e.g. [M1] or M2}. Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Made Memoy) 3-49 A 3 Useful Copy Functions7 Press the [OK] key. hee Wavory] Prass the OK key to recall the wode. ‘The display returns to the Special Features hk Auto 1 ameime screen, a eratin ea aa ee oe > 8 Press the (Done] key. 8 The display returns to the Basic Features screen. é = 8 2 3 3 ” Recalling a Copy Job 1 Press the [Special Features] key. wey 3-50 Storing Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)2 Press the {Mode Memory] key. 3 select the memory key where the copy setting you want to recall is stored. 3 > Useful Copy Functions 4. Check the copy settings stored to the memory key. Ifthe contents are correct, press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features soreen. @ NOTE + Recalling a copy job from memory cancels the cur- rent copy job. + Alter recalling a copy job from memory, you can change its settings and make copies. + Ifyou press another memory key, the copy job stored in that key is recalled. 5 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-51Vv 3 > Useful Copy Functions Erasing a Copy Job 1. Press the [Special Features] key. aR 100% __Auto 1 2. Press the [Mode Memory] key. ae Brteent saw ig sus bora. fos way — ect V2 = | 3 > Press the [Store/Erase] key. bos Weyl Geet Dw amar ty Tr we el] 4 press the [Erase] key. fog way) suet De ens ay Tr ms Pa (Strats) st a i, 3-52 _Storing/ Recalling Otten Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Nemary)5 select the memory key of the copy job that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key. © werortant * Check the copy settings before you erase them. @ NOTE + The mode memory key where copy settings are already stored shows a small, black square [1] in the lower right corner ofthe key. + ityou selected a memory key to which a copy job thas already been stored, its settings are olsplayed. + If there are more stored copy modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [¥] or [a] keys. 6 The message on the right appears to contirm that you want to erase the copy job. Select the [Yes] key. The stored copy job is erased. @ NOTE +The name of the memory key is not erased. For details on how to change the name, see ‘Storing a Memory Key Name,”on p. 3-48. + if you want to cancel erasing, select the [No] key. ‘The message “Erased.” is displayed for about two seconds on the touch panel display. Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Made Memory) 3-53 3 Useful Copy Functions7 Press the [Cancel] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen, > 8 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 3 > Useful Copy Functions 354 Storing’ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memary)Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) You can recall up to three previously set copy jobs and make copies using these settings. © weortant + One copy job is detined by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom ets. and pressing the 7) or & key when the Auto Clear function ison, or by calling up a copy job stored in memory. fone ofthese keys was not pressed, ori the Auto Clear function isnot activ, caling up a copy job by pressing the Recall key is not possible. + Once stored, the three copy jobs are held in memory even i the power is turned OFF + The Standard mode is not stored. + Copy modes already stored isnot stored 1 Place your originals and press the [Special et rama Features] key. 2 Press the [Recall] key. ee Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Reval) 3-55 3 Useful Copy Functions3. Useful Copy Functions 3. Select one of the [1 Before], [2 Before] or [3 Before] keys. Check that the copy settings are correct, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. @ NOTE + You can also check which copy jobs are stored to memory other than the currently displayed copy job by pressing the [¥] or [a] key. ieaih recs tw Oey Foal De Wo 4. Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. 3-56 Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)Original SCENE Kc > ‘Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) This function enables you to make copies of the original inverting the black and the white areas. 1 Place your originals and press the [Special Features] key. sre loox tir v 2 Press the [¥] key to display the Special Fea- tures screen (2/2). Inverting Original Images (NegaPos) i ve 3 > Useful Copy Functions3 Press the [Nega/Posi] key. > 4 pres he [Done ky. ‘The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 3. Useful Copy Functions 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [ ¥], and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the [= key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 3-58 _Inverting Original Images (NegaPos})Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the lengthwise or widthwise direction. The following two setting methods are available for the Image Repeat mode. © Automatic setting The original image is copied so that the maximum possible of copies fit in the selected paper size. Original Copy cry i|:> (#4 The original image is copied for the specified number of times. Original Copy CIry. gi ° |8 Example : When “3 times” is specified “Images overlap when copied. ©) iweortant + In the Image Repeat (manual setting) mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two- page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Diferent Size Originals, image Combination, Image Separation, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. + In the Image Repeat (auto setting) mode, combined use withthe Automatic Paper Selection and Auto ‘medes in adalion to the modes mentioned above cannot be set Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated Image Repeat) 3-59 3 Useful Copy Functions3 Useful Copy Functions " 1 Place your originals and press the [Special Features] key. 100% 2 LIRO 2 Press the [¥] key to display the Special Fea- tures screen (2/2). pire Ses pa oul Brea 3 Press the [Image Repeat] key. foes (Evaro ch 4. set the number of image repeat times for of the lengthwise and widthwise directions. @ Automatic setting Press the [Auto] key. @ NOTE + To make repeated copies with the number of ‘repeats automaticaly set, select the paper size. The original image is then copied so that the maxi- mum possible number of copies fit in the selected paper size. Stag aa bones roan fee (+1 Lam io (=f +1 3-60 Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (image Repeat)@ Manual setting Press the [-] or [+] key to set the number of images. € NOTE + The number of times that the image can be set to repeat is from 1 to 20. + Sometimes the designated image will overlap ‘depending on how many times you have manually set ito be repeated. 5 Press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen (2/2). 6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. 7 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [W], [Image Repeat), and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ¢} key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) 3-61 3° Useful Copy Functions3 Useful Copy Functions ¥ “Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror image) This function copies images as if reflected in the mirror, reversing the right and left sides. Original Copy cy © irortant + In the Mirror Image mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shif, Booklet, Margin, Frame Erase, Image Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. 1 Place the original and press the [Special Fea- tures] key. 100% 2 LTR OD 2 Press the [¥] key to display the Special Fea- tures screen (2/2). 2) (rene 3-62 Making Copies with Image Reversed (Miror mage)3. Press the [Mirror image] key. 4 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Syston tor 5. Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [J, and [Mirror Image] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the £ key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirorinage) 3-63 3 Useful Copy Functions3. Useful Copy Functions Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) This mode allows you to make copies of original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To make copies with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To make copies with photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key. @Low If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a Photo mode, moiré or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this moiré effect so that the copy is easier on the eyes. inted photograph using the Original Copy Low set Low not set RES@RT PLAN RES@RT PLAN RES@RT PLAN oy carestin aa Tictyeciestaneas Tiyeouestn oe Splat ee ce Sylar eee Sedans nee @ High This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals. Original Copy High set High not set RES@RT PLAN RES@RT PLAN RES@RT PLAN ‘any ra sso Titan eseeaeh saan kan od oho mya 3-64 — Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Staroness)1 Place your originals and press the [Special Features] key. 2. Press the [¥] key to display the Special Fea- tures screen (2/2). 3 press the [Sharpness] key. 4 Use the [Low] or [High] key to adjust the sharpness, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen (2/2). @ NOTE + To copy text and lines clearly, the setting should be towards "High. To copy photographs etc. the set- ting should be towards “Low. Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-65 A 3 Useful Copy Functions5 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. > 6 Proceed to make copies in the usual way. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [V] [Sharpness}, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + You can also cancel the mode by pressing the & key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 3 Useful Copy Functions 3-66 — Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)> Using the Mail Box Functions Tr printing. Flow of Mail Box Operations aes Storing Originals in the Box........... Printing Documents Stored in the Box. . Scanning Originals into a Box . Specifying Document Size (Doc. ‘Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure)... -...00..eeeeeeeeceeeeeeevteeeseeaes ‘Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio). ‘Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) ‘Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation) ......... ‘Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . .... Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase).....-....-.....00e05 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination) vee ‘Scanning Ditferent-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Ditferent Size Originals) . Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi). Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings . Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . Collating Prints (Finisher) Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . ‘Adging Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (CoveriJob Separator) . are Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)... 0.2.0. s sss csssvse sce Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents)... . Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Pin). Checking the Documents Detailed Information Changing the Name of a Document. Moving a Document......... Erasing a Document from a Box ..... 425 427 4.29 = 437 4d = 443 4-45 4.47 4-49 4-49 451 4-55 457 4-60 4-63 4-65 4-67 468 4-70 472 chapter describes the Mail Box functions with which you can temporarily store data for later 44 A 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions Flow of Mail Box Operations This section describes the flow of basic Mail Box operations dividing it in two parts; Scanning origi- nals and Printing. @ NOTE + For details on the following items, see the indicated pages. + Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.) - Leading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.) - Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.) Storing Originals in the Box ‘The operation is the same as when making copies. First, place the originals you want to store in the feeder or on the platen glass, then set the desired modes. When the machine is used as a network printer, you can store data into the box from a computer. 1 Press the fia) key. cory bee scan | 2 select the desired box number. € NOTE + When the desired box isnot displayed, press the [¥]or [a] key, + When you enter the box number using the Numeric keys (-@), press the [OK] key atter entering the box number. + Ifa box is set with a password, a locked mark [&\Jis displayed next to that box icon. + If document is stored in a box, that box is s- played withthe [4a] icon. 4-2 Flow of Mail Box Operations3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key. & NOTE + Enter the password used when the box was stored. (See “Satting/ Storing the Box," on p. 6-45,) Ifa password has not been stored, this operation is not necessary. ts 1% fw tte peor wig te 4. Press the [Scan] key. ie ic ‘et 2 se . ui (= Ej eee nate 5 Place your originals. (See “Placing Originals,” on p. 1-11.) LES 6 specity the scanning mode. @ NOTE + You can set various modes when scanning the original as when making copies. a /100% i Pie ey = ey Th nit etter Flow of Mall Box Operations 43 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions 7 Press the “() key. When scanning is completed, the display returns to the screen in step 4. © important + You cannot change the settings such as the scan- ning quantity and scanning paper size during scan- ning. @ NOTE “When you want to stop scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the “key. @ When the screen on the right appears: Press the “% key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + You can change the setting of the Two-sided’ ‘One-sided modes, Image Quality and Scanning Exposure, oF _) any 1 2m, Pray nla dn Sot key. Ee oa 8 when scanning is completed, the scanned SEE == data is stored in the selected box. @ NOTE + The stored document is automaticaly stored with the name of 'year, month, date and time". For example, when the data was scanned at 1:35 (PM), 41 seconds, on August 12, 2000, its name is “2000812133541 + You can also change the name of the stored data. (See “Changing the Name of a Document,” on p. 4-68) +The stored data is deleted after 3 days. This can be changed between "no limit” and 30 days. (See “Set- ting/ Storing the Box,"on p. 6-45.) 4-4 Flow of Mail Box Operations ce [sree an [= eter wotPrinting Documents Stored in the Box You can print documents stored in a box from this machine, When the machine is used as a network printer, you can also specify printing from the computer. For details on how to operate the machine from personal computers, see the Remote UI User's Guide, @ NOTE + You can select and print up to 32 documents in one box at a time. When you merge documents, you can key,) + To reserve the next print, press the [Done] key and begin by selecting the box in which the desired documents stored. (See “Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Prin})"on p. 59.) ‘When printing is completed, the display returns to the Box selection screen. ‘When you select multiple documents. [yates wor iF) Paine Flow of Mail Box Operations 4-7 4 Using the Mail Box FunctionsVv 4 Using the Mail Box Functions Scanning Originals into a Box Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) You can select the document size when scanning transparencies, or especially when specifying the document size before scanning. NOTE + The default setting is “Auto” 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [==] mp Select the desired box number map [©] sa Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password atter selecting the box. 2. Press the (Doc. Size Select] key. ae 100% ti o bree fay [Beet ncorotnccnts fa |i 7 — [Co nite settree oo 3. select the document size, and press the a [Done] key. eee oy © eortant fare] SoG Ses] Ml +n the Automatic Document Size Selection mode, a combined use with the Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Com- ination modes cannot be set + You cannot select the [Auto] key when scanning the following type of originals. Specity the size of the document manually. = Non-standard size originals - Highly transparent originals such as transparen- cies = Originals with an extremely dark background - Originals smaller than STMT in size @ NOTE + To select A or B series paper size, press the IAB -size] key. 4-8 Scanning Originals into a Box4 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen. Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure) Manual Adjustment of the Scanning Exposure You can manually adjust the scanning exposure to the most appropriate level for the original. 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [==] => Select the desired box number mm @ NOTE => Place the original + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the bax. 2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key. @ NOTE + Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark] keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to the right to make the exposure darker. a oe (100% ff o (re [see ee dma ea te JG IG 3 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings} key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the ( key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Scanning Originals into a Box 49 A 4 Using the Mail Box FunctionsVv 4 Using the Mail Box Functions Selecting Image Quality ‘You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The following three modes are available for adjusting image quality. @ Text mode This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be scanned clearly. @ TextPhoto mode This mode is best suited for scanning originals contai @ Photo mode This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos). © ieortant + if you scan an original containing hall-tones such as a printed photegraph using the Photo mode, moiré may occur. If this hagpens, you can soften this morié effect by using the Sharpness mode, (See “Scan- ning Originals ater Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness),"on p.4-47,) * Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. Ifyou select one of these modes, the previously set ‘mode is canceled. @ NOTE + When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mods, the scanning exposure can be adjusted only by Manual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be set. + When the “Photo Mode” of Mail Box Settings is set to “On’, you can select printed image or photo after pressing the [(]] Key. (See ‘Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function,"on p. 6-50.) + Ifthe original isa transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the ‘most appropriate level 1g both text and photos. 1 Prepare to scan the ori ith the procedure below. [==] map Select the desired box number amp [>= > Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [7] key. =o 100% tm o Pret fee, Jet toaster rie mer ES Je 4-10 Scanning Originals into Box3 select the type of your original (Text, aaa Text/Photo, Photo). a 100% to P= ES, = eal co When the "Photo Mode" of Mail Box Settings is set — to“On', you can select the [Printed Img.] or ° _ [Photo] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the 100% “8 5 Mail Box Function,”on p. 6-50.) ‘oe rath ect 8) BB rte oO Fens Fae | Bree 0. = 4. Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the an scanning exposur = pe | 100% Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark] Preet [re keys tothe lot to make the exposure lighter or to. the right to make the exposure darker. —_ —_oo Eee 5 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box," on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Aj key. + To cancel the settings, press the [Inival Setting] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode) + When you press the @; key, the olsplay returns to the Box selection screen. 1g Originals into aBox 4-11 4 Using the Mail Box Functions}ox Functions ' S = 2 3 + Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. ==] map Select the desired box number mp [= mp Place the o @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2. Press the [A] key. TT TST The scanning exposure is automatically adjusted - to the level best suited to the quality of the 100% original. Pi NOTE + If the original is a transparency, you may not be Gia |e! abjo to use Automatic Exposure Control. so, Coe) Emo ate adjust the scanning exposure using Manual Expo- ‘sure Control sterner 3 start scanning the original. (See "Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the (2; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-12 Scanning Originals into a BoxChanging the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio) Scanning Originals after Enlarging/ Reducing them to a Standard Record Size (Preset Zoom) You can scan the originals after enlarging/reducing them to a standard record size. 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. sm Select the desired box number mp [=| emp Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Copy Ratio] key. a aa 100% lel, = Ee foams 3 To reduce, solect a reduction ratio. To enlarge, Ga aE wa ‘select an enlargement ratio. 40056 aK 20% FM [ccm awe 4 press the [Done] key. Tier tod eb ay FV Tmo | [De Gin ae pga Bent =e [beter voto Scanning Originals into a Box 4-13 A 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions 7 5 start scanning the original. (See "Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2) @ NOTE “+ To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the settings, press the [Inal Settings) key (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) «When you press the £4 key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Specifying the Scanning Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) You can reduce or enlarge images by any scanning ratio, in 1% increments. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [==] mp Select the desired box number am [=] map Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2. Press the [Copy Ratio] key. aa a a ia (=) Boxciamot [Feat {al} (eret_) ital serties 3 Enter the ratio using the Numeric keys hwo i To (@-©) or the [-] and [+] keys. | To BU Be HITT Sh Sa @ NOTE + Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys (©-@), you can change the entered values with the [-] and [+] keys. +f you make a mistake when entering values, press the & key, and enter the correct value. = [aster enter 4-14 Scanning Originals into a Box2 Basic Copying 1 Place your original on the platen glass and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. @ NOTE + If you want to make copies in page order, begin copying from the frst page and work your way for ward, + Place the original face down so that its top edge is aligned with the back edge of the platen glass. 2 Press the [Book b2-Sided] key, and press the [Next] key. 3 select the type of layout, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + if you select the [Left/Right Two-sided) key, the fac- ing pages are copied onto the front and back sides ofa single sheet. + It you select the [Front/Back Two-sided] key, the front and back sides of the left page, or the front ‘and back sides of the right page are copied onto the front and back sides ofa single sheet. The display returns to the Basic Features screen and "Book b2-Sided! is displayed above the [Two- sided Mode} key. 2-46 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Node} Tee Sues vol Soact © Tod cpr Teo BP ap [iea-Sied P= _] Place the original & NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Copy Ratio] key. Teaay to 2m. 100%__ tk o a) a ort amare = ay a El nears : Poet enter ‘Scanning Originals into a Box 4-17 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 3 Press the [Other Zoom] key. Tey RT vm Tewoom | [ido [Boe em | een | 2 Hh Gent 1a Lia ox Tix ate Ean csrmaaeinnaae 4. Press the [Zoom Program] key. [Piece (ote Ton) Sesto hoe Ts Gq 3) [ester vente’ 5 Press the [Original Size] key and enter the TER original size, then press the [Record Size] key ee i tare te Ra and enter the size to be recorded. Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (-@) and the & key on the control panel. + If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the values again. + If you want to enter values in milimeters, press the [rnm] key. + For details on how to enter values in inches, see ‘Setting in Inches," on p. 10-8. + To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction (X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently, ress the [XY Zoom] key. “If the zoom rato is less than 25%, a message tell ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. Iti is more than 400%, a message telling ‘you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear. 4-18 Scanning Originals into a Box6 start scanning the original. (See "Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. + To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Zoom [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order, + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the (3% key, the display returns to the Box. @ Scanning with different XY scanning ratios selection screen. (XY Zoom) 1. Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. @ NOTE mp Select the desired box number => mp Place the o nal * When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2. Press the [Copy Ratio] key. aoe 100% to iweifce, = = Ie [peter owt 3. press the {other Zoom key. a Fatal nari ay wy SY 7a GTA Oo): [abe ae Tee] cao [am fe | — JE] ewe oH [ope | Leu =] oar Scanning Originals into a Box 4-19 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 4. Press the [Zoom Program] key. 5 Press the [XY Zoom] key. Tether Teel Seact te tan Spe iB os rend eras Um craps st we te rent sae coe tw mas hays 6 Press the [x1 (horizontal direction) key and [Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the original size and record size, and enter the values for X and Y with the Numeric keys. @ NOTE + When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (@-@) and the & key on the control pane + Ifyou make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct values. + I you want to enter values in millimeters, press the Imm) key. + For details on how to enter values in inches, see “Setting in Inches," on p. 10-8. + To set the same values for the X and ¥ axes, press the [Zoom] key. + I the zoom rato is less than 25%, a message tell ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will ‘appear. Ifit is more than 400%, a message telling ‘you that the ratio wll be adjusted to 400% will ‘appear. 4-20 Scanning Originals into a Box real, recra sa eyter wont7 Enter all values, and press the [OK] key. eT foerd Scar the mare fae (Boa a = Life) 8 start scanning the original (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + Place the original on the platen glass ifthe zoom ratio is more than 200%. + To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the 22; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Enlarging/Reducing Originals at Scanning Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can scan an original enlarging or reducing it to different XY scanning ratios. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. © ieortant + You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the XY Zoom mode. Specity the ‘scanning ratio. @ NOTE + Ifan error occurs between the XY Zoom scanning and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See ‘Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur,"on p. 6-30.) 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [=] mp Select the desired box number ma mp Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. Scanning Originals intoa Box 4-21 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions 2. Press the [Copy Ratio] key. 3 Press the [other Zoom) key. [Ey mt setts ny att woe Tray oY iro To} (am =< Be tT sox Baan Tae eT rie ann 4. Press the [XY Zoom] key. 4-22 ‘Scanning Originals into a Box5 Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each val- ues for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + You can enter the numbers using the Numeric keys (®-@) on the control panel. + If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct values. + Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys (®-©), you can change the entered values with ee ove the F-] and [+] keys. + iftyou enter a value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. 6 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. + To cancel the setting, press the (Copy Ratio, [Other Zoom, [XY Zoom, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Intal Settings) key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the & key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to scan each side separately. © important + In the Two-sided Original mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, and image Combination modes cannot be set. + Place the original horizontally when scanning originals such as LTARY STMTA size. If these originals are placed vertically the back side ofthe print wil be printed upside down, 1. Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [=] mp Select the desired box number map => Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. ‘Scanning Originals intoaBox 4-23 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions 7 2 Press the [Two-sided Original] key. a loox fo Pr fice See nina Ee J IF (o = Eo] mst 3 select the type of original, and press the [OK] key. 4 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) € NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that aopear on the display and press the “@) key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Original] and [Cancel] keys in that order. * To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the &; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-24 Scanning Originals into a BoxScanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation) This feature enables you to scan facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper. © rortant +n the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided Original, Booklet Scanning, Diferent Size Originals, Binding Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. + Ptace your originals on the platen glass. You cannot scan originals placed inthe feeder using the Two-page Separation mode. 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [==] mp Select the desired box number mp —] => Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + If you want to record in page order, begin scanning from the first page and work your way forward. + Place the original face down so that the original's top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. aT 100% fio i | ae eo ae| TE nit settros 3. Press the [Two-page Separation] key. aa = a [Bocce [ereness Ea m= _| ere [ster voto Scanning Originals into a Box 4-25 4 Using the Mail Box Functions :4 Using the Mail Box Functions . 4 Press the [Done] key. eaten 0 all Eee 5 start scanning the original. (See "Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.) For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the “~% key again. When scanning is ‘completed, press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Two-page Separation] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the 2; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-26 Scanning Originals into a BoxScanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) ‘You can scan originals in such a way that, when printing the scanned data, the output papers can be easily made into a booklet. Specify the Booklet mode when printing the scanned data. (See “Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Bookilet),”on p. 4-60.) © important + In the Booklet Scanning mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Different Size Originals, Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. + When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the ‘even number pages will be printed upside down. Place these originals vertically. 1 Prepare to scan the [5] mp Select the desired box number mp @ NOTE al into the box with the procedure below. a> Place the original + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. a Ta 100% to Pre [eb Erie I arcafonaot) io ee (Panat” _|leseree a 3 press the [Booklet Scanning] key. ipa Feouresd feat |) Games] Eines ioent om | fro ome fraeset = f (eae Scanning Originals into a Box 427 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 7 4 sotect the original size, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To scan two-sided original, also press the [2-Sided Original] key. + To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB size] key. @When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of the original, and press the [OK] key. Becket Serra] Sout Ue poet Se (cz [Tea O) fist [ia7c) (star a fsneTaqy Ghee 5 select the booklet layout size, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + The originals are recorded to match halt the size of selected paper size. To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB-size) key. 6 Press the [Done] key. 4-28 Scanning Originals into a Box7 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box," on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + When the orginal is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the “(e) key once for each original. When scanning is completed, pross the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features}, [Booklet Scanning], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the @) key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase features are available. ©) imeortant ‘Combinations ofthese three modes cannot be set. Ifyou select one ofthese modes, the previously set ‘mode is canceled. Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original is smaller than the selected record paper size, then records it. © important + In the Orginal Framte Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet ‘Scanning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. @ Book Frame Erase Erases the dark borders as well as center and contour lines that appear when printing facing pages in a bound original onto a single record paper, then records them. © mrortant + In the Book Frame Erase mode, combined use withthe Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet Scan- ning, Dtferent Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. © Binding Erase Erases the shadows that appear in prints from binding holes in originals, then records them. © meortant + In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation and Booklet Scanning ‘modes cannot be set. + Do not place erginals with binding holes inthe feeder, as this may damage the originals. ————— Scanning Originals into aBox 4-29 A 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions 7 Frasing Frame Lines and Storing the Original (Original Frame Erase) 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure betow. [==] mp Select the desired box number amp [>| ma Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. r=] 100% tk o Pe ee a aa Ta ren one 3 > Press the [Frame Erase] key. == 4 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key. 4-30 Scanning Originals into a Box5 select the size of the or [Next] key. @ NOTE + You can only set the Original Frame Erase mode for original sizes shown in the touch panel display. + To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB size] key. inal, and press the 6 set the desired original frame erase width using the [-] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. The value set here is specified uniformly around the original ‘To set frame erase width value for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the original independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key. @ NOTE + When entering values in milimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (@-®) and the & key on the control panel. + If you enter @ value outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value wil appear on the sereen. + Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys (®-@), you can change the values using the Flor fe] key. + Ifyou want fo enter values in millimeters, press the [mm key. + The default setting is 1/8" (4 mm). @ When you select the [Adjust Each Dim key: Select each side in turn and set the frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. Tarai Fone Coal Sci Ue orohal sass ("0 Se fivxi7a) sna [sraTecy Ge Eee eal Soniye eto ith Tz NEI ‘Scanning Originals intoa Box 4-31 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 7 Press the [Done] key. Ta Fae =) 8 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box," on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase}, and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the (key the dsplay returns to the Box selection screen, Erasing the Book Frame and Storing the Original (Book Frame Erase) 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [==] mp Select the desired box number mp sm} Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. Tan Baa 100% tivo (ree = _ EJ" o Cocoa} TL ts setts [pete rete 4-32 Scanning Originals into a Box3 ross the [Frame Erase] key. ean Far = eo] an 4. Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press. the [Next] key. [Fra frase) Sect a Fraw Frowe Teale | Fare rem ees 5 Select the size of the book when opened, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE “To select A or B serles paper size, press the [AB-size] key. 4 Using the Mail Box Functions Scanning Originals intoaBox 4-334 Using the Mail Box Functions 6 Press each key ("Top", “Left”, “Center”, “Right”, and “Bottom”) and set the desired book frame erase width using the [-] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. ‘The values set here are specified independently * iat A around the original. To set a value uniformly |_17 6) Canes around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once] iG)~ key. @ NOTE + When entering values in milimetars, you can use the Numeric keys (@-@) and the & key on the control panel. + if you entera valve outside the setting range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriate value wil appear on the screen. + Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys (© -@), you can change the values using the Flor] key. + if you want fo enter values in milimeters, press the Imm) key. + The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for “Center” and 1/8" (4 mm) for “Top", “Left, "Right" and “Bot- tom @When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key: Set the desired book frame erase width us the [-] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. bk Fae Gos Sw tw Tr Wass wT i oo 1 ane) Gen. ‘i= 7 Press the [Done] key. 4-34 Scanning Originals into a Box8 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) € NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order, + To cancel the settings, press the [inital Setings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the (7 key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Erasing the Shadows of Binding Holes and Storing the Original (Binding Erase) 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [== map Select the desired box number amp f°" wm Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + Place the original on the platen glass. 2. Press the [Special Features] key. marae 100% tf _o ae | Baie Joon i 3 Press the [Frame Erase] key. Scanning Originals into a Box 4-35 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 4. Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the Next] key. oa Ss re ene 5 specity the binding erase feature, and press Ses ‘the [Next] key. © NOTE FF + The position of the binding holes refers not to the position in which the original is placed on the platen glass, but o the position of the binding holes viewed when the surface of the original that you want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top. ste nto Set the desired binding erase width using the [or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE 436 When entering values in milimeters, you can use the Numeric keys (®-@) and the & key on the control panel + If you enter a valve outside the sating range, a ‘message prompting you to enter the appropriato value will appear on the screen. + Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys (-@), you can change the values using the Jor [+] key. + If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the mm) key. +The default setting is 9/4" (18 mm). ‘Scanning Originals into a Box aca erate cty te Tam wa vat, t= eo nemo - le coves fst fx7 Press the [Done] key. ipo Fetireed 8 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order, + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings} key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the (3 key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination) This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals and records them to fit on one side or both sides of a selected record size. © iwrortant + In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Two-page Sep- aration, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, Original Frame Erase, and Book Frame Erase modes ‘cannot be set. + Originals printed in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode in combination with the Different Size Originals mode. @ NOTE + The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals ft on the selected record size. @20n1 Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them. e@40n1 Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them. @80nt Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them. ‘Scanning Originals into aBox 437 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [==] mp Select the desired box number amp [* @ NOTE emp Place the original + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. ree 100% to Ear (ese Le ww etre font 3 Press the [image Combination] key. ESTES Ee 2 = a ear | Foreme Pees | (tee 4. Select the size of the originals, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + When reducing @ two-sided original, press the [2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original size, + To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB:size] key. 4-38 Scanning Originals into a Box fetes tonto Ege Owbratanl Seciy Dw wore te, a (Ra fist) Beret inxr7ay [SIM Ci sTHTAS@When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key. [Sees eraeaet Sect te tm oF erora 5 select the desired image Combination feature, and press the [Next] key. @When you select the [Option] key: Select the image order, and press the [Done] key. 4On7,8Ont ‘Scanning Originals into a Box 439 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions 6 select the record size, and press the [OK] key. ESS ESTSY GETS RTS @ NOTE + The document is scanned withthe reduction rato automatically set depending onthe selected record size + Ta select A or B series paper size, press the IAB -sizo} key. 7 Press the [Done] key. 8 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + When the original is placed on the platen glass, folow the instructions that appear on the display and press the “= key once for 6ach orignal. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + Wien you press the ®; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-40 Scanning Originals into a BoxScanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) This function enables you to scan different-size originals with the same width, or different-size originals with different widths, together in one group. © important + In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Manual Document Size Select, Two-page ‘Separation, Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and image Combination modes cannot be set. + All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type). + Align the top edge ofthe originals wih the back edge ofthe feeder when placing diferent-width originals. + Set the diffrent-size originals with cifferent width with the combinations as follows. Other combinations ‘may damage the originals. = 1117" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTAR. + When you place diferent-wicth originals, the originals may slighty be moved when fed to the platen glass, and as a result, the images may be scanned slantwise. 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [=] mp Select the desired box number sap > Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. aaa 3 Press the [Ditferent Size Originals] key. EES Beeston | [ovr eat | aos === (ene J Eee ‘Scanning Originals intoaBox 4-41 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions ' 4 select the type of the Different Size Originals, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + When you set the same-wicth originals, press the [Same Width] key. + When you set the diferent-width originals, press the [Diflerent Width] key. 5 Press the [Done] key Beta Sin ran) Soy te eo eres vee 6 start scannitig the o (See “Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + When the orginal is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear onthe display and ‘press the “%> key once for each original. Whon scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. + To cancel the satin, press the [Special Features), [Ditferent Size Originals, and [Cancel keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the ¢= key, the dsplay returns to the Box selection screen. 4-42 Scanning Originals into a BoxScanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are stored as one document afterall the batches have been scanned. © meortant + You cannot change the scan settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary settings beforehand according tothe typeof orignal and desired Finisher mode. +f yu place the orginal inthe feeder, remove the orginal sequently from the orginal output area when ‘scanning is completed. + When you place different size originals in the feeder, set the Diferont size Originals mode. € NOTE + When you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the Two-sided Original mode beforehand if the frst batch of originals is two-sided. To scan next originai(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of orginal + Its useful to store originals ina box and print them withthe Merge Documents mode when you cannot Prepare originals at once, or when you want to set diferent settings for each original. (See “Printing Multi- pple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),"0n p. 4-63.) 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. =] lm Select the desired box number map [= __| am Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. Scanning Originals into a Box 4-43 4 Using the Mail Box Functionsjox Functions y 4 Using the Mail 3 Press the [Job Build] key. ‘ fee |) Bate 4. Press the [Done] key. 5 press the “(3) key to start scanning the origi- nals. @ NOTE + You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Qual ity. (See "Adjusting the Exposure and Image Qual- ity before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure),"on p. 4-9.) + You can change the setting of the original type (One-sided/Two-sided). (See “Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original)” on p. 4-23.) + To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the “D key. @When scanning Two-sided originals: Press the [2-sided Original] key. Senge tne trohal ae press the Start hay © wortant + Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Orgi- nal mode according to the type of original. 4-44 Scanning Originals into a BoxSelect the type of two-sided original, and press the [OK] key. 6 When scanning is completed, set the next original. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the last original is scanned, then press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and {Job Build] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Ital Settings) key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scan- ring mode.) When you press the 2) key, the olsplay returns to the Box selection screen. 4 Using the Mail Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) This function enables you to record the original inverting the black and the white areas. 1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [5] mp Select the desired box number map [=] am Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. Scanning Originals intoa Box 4-454 Using the Mail Box Functions " 2 Press the [Special Features] key. STE 100% te o Pree, Je foam pe. ! =—) Lo wits settnge [stent ee 7 Sime iad Fem | 3 Press the [Nega/Posi] key. a 4 Press the [Done] key. Tore aa | — arte } fen 5 start scanning the original. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-2.) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine retums to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the (2) key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-48 Scanning Originals into a BoxScanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) This mode allows you to scan original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To scan originals with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To scan originals with photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key. @ Low If you want to scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moiré or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this moiré effect so that the print is easier on the eyes. @ High This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals. 1. Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. [=] mp Select the desired box number map mp Place the original @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Special Features] key. aa 100% to CEES IEE doom tanw 3 Press the [Sharpness] key Tspecish Features) renee an = ee E= a=) eS a) (ster enter A 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Use the [High] or [Low] key to adjust the sharpness, and press the [OK] key. Fiera? rom We are to act we sere @ NOTE + To scan text and lines clearly, the setting should be towards “High”. To scan photographs etc., the set- ting should be towards “Low”. 5 Press the [Done] key. Birivere ce | from ome Ears 6 start scanning the original. (See "Storing Originals in the Box," on p. 4-2,) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features), [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) + When you press the &; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4 Using the Mail Box Functions " 4-48 Scanning Originals into a BoxSettings ng-a Document in a Box after Changing the ‘You can select the modes when printing documents stored in a box. Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) 1. specity the desired document with procedure below. @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. ‘ma Select the desired box number, then the desired document map 2 Press the [Change P Settings] key. 3 Press the [Paper Select] key. @ NOTE + When you press the [initial Settings] key, the docu- ‘ment recorded from a personal computer returns to the former settings set from the computer, and the ‘scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing, LL Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings Team ATT ‘it BTR Oo fase sect 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 4 select the print paper size, and press the [Done] key. @ When you select the [StackBypass Setting] key: Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + If there is a current job or a previously reserved job which uses the stack bypass, select the [StackBy- pass Setting] key and set the desired paper. + To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB -size] key. Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key. [iiex ent mar We ae 2 Bee iss Baik 0 =o Te Paw oO face oe [PO fyten vente ston Op Srttral Soot Be paw saa. ist Of | [frre] sna] Ee 2 = ae 5 Press the [Start Print] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed (See “Printing Documents Stored in the Box,"on p.4-5.) @ NOTE + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings} key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) + When you press the (2; key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. SURO 1 in | [ris TE et stor 450 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the SettingsCollating Prints (Finisher) The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the prints in various ways by pages or print sets. (See ‘Collating Copies [Finiser," on p. 2-48.) 1 specity the desired document with procedure below. [rs] sa Select the desired box number, then the desired document mmp [°" @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 ress the [Change P Settings] key. 3 Press the [Finisher] key. €@ NOTE + When you press the [initial Settings} key, the docu- ‘ment recorded trom a personal computer returns to the former settings set from the computer, and the fat scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing. mntat settowe Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-51 4. Using the Mail Box FunctionsVv 4 Using the Mail Box Functions 4 select the desired collate feature, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + When you selected the [Staple] key, press the [Next] key. + The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached. + The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is not attached. + The [Hole Punch] key only appears when the Puncher Unit-B1 (option) unit is attached to the Finisher. + The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached. @ When you select the [Staple] key: Select the type of stapling( [Corner], [Double], {Saddle Stitch] ), and press the [OK] key. © important + You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch, +The maximum number of papers which can be sta- pled at atime is as follows: 11°17 LGL/ LTAR: 30 sheets “UTR 50 sheets, When you select the [Corner] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. © iwrortant + STMTR size paper cannot be corner-staple. ‘When the Finisher and the Punch- fytes wor er Unit-B1 are attached. TFeiser] ot» alate Fore ney 2g ster tote ‘When the Finisher is not attached. Tiapel Seen Ge ste pn 4-52 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the SettingsWhen you select the [Double] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. © mrortant + LGL/LTAR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be dou- ble-stapled. When you selact the [Saddle Stitch] key: Press the [Nex!] key. © imeortant You cannot select the (Saddle Stitch} key when the ‘Sadle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. + LGL/LTRY STMTA-size paper cannot be saddle a ESO hee ta stat oe (aera ha 07 | stitched. sae eo oem @ NOTE + You can set the [Sadale Stitch) key when youselect = | ter tore the [Two-sided Printing] key. (See “Two-sided Print- ing (Two-sided Printing)"on p. 4-55.) + You can adjust the sadcle stitch position. (See “Changing the Saddle Stitch Position,"on p. 6:32.) Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key. 4 Using the Mail Box Functions OO Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-534 Using the Mail Box Functions @When you select the [Rotate] key: When the Automatic Paper Selection is set, press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key. NOTE + Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key in the following case: Available paper size is selected manually. - Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal, and vertical direction. - Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper drawer loaded with available paper size is set to ont @ When you select the [Hole Punch] key: Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets. © important + The machine automatically selects the type of hole ‘punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size. 2 holes: LGL/LTRR - Sholes: 11°x177/ LTR + You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper. + Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, trac- ing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch. 5 Press the [Start Print] key. 4-54 If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. (See ‘Printing Documents Stored in the Box,"on p. 45,) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings} key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) + When you press the @) key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. Printing a Document in a Box after Chany [ere ra ot Pe ee Si ih ies tn tik eRe sta 2 at oO ose ontea) [em LTR _D) =J rer one gtigo 1 = mz ED aaa Cae Gee)Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) © ieortant + In the Two-sided Printing mode, combined use withthe Booklet mode cannot be set. + Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided prints. € NOTE + Print paper used to make two-sided prints must conform to the following specifications. = Paper size: 11°x17'/ LGL/LTR/ LTRR/STMTR - Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m?) There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to print in the Two-sided Printing mode. + When printing an odd numbered document, the back of the last page is left blank. (The machine's counter ‘does not count the blank page as a print.) + You cannot make two-sided prints from different size originals. These originals will be output as one-sided prints on citferent size papers which sult their sizes. 1. specity the desired document with procedure below. [=r] map Select the desired box number, then the desired document map /*** @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Change P Settings] key. Sees [cts vente 3 Press the [Two-sided Printing] key. @ NOTE + When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu- ‘ment recorded from a personal computer returns to the former settings set from the computer, and the scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing, o i (resi - [Srsten Monitor 1 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-55 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions , 4. solect the appropriate orientation, and press the [OK] key. € NOTE + If you want to print the first page of each document ‘on the front when documents are to be merged and also the Finisher mode (except for the Group mode) is selected, press the [Non Continuous] key. If you want to print continuously without inserting any blank pages between the documents, press the [Continuous] key. fv-sod Prt) Sect tw oot Ue then ero aaa 5 Press the [Start Print] key. It there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed (See ‘Printing Documents Stored in the Box,” on p45.) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Print- ing] and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [initial Settings] key. (The machine retums to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) + When you press the (2) key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. eiiro 1 Os from |Gezra] GS zim Ch mere a) (eter vont 4-56 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the SettingsAdding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator) When you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode, you can program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, or job separator sheets to divide each document, using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text. © irortant + You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode. (See "Printing Mutiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),"on p. 4-63.) + In the Cover/Job Separator mode, combined use with the Non-collate, Group, Offset Group, Memory Col- lating, Memory Grouping, and Booklet modes cannot be set + You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or job separator sheets. + Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30 shoets (for 11°x177/ LGL/ LTAR size) or 60 sheets (tor LTR size). 1. specity the desired documents with procedure below. =] sm Select the desired box number, then the d ired documents mp FF @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Change P Settings] key. 3 Press the [Merge Documents] key. @ NOTE Tene eT BLIRO 1 + The {Merge Documents] key only appears when net you select multiple dacuments. e + When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu- =] = _] ‘ment recorded from a personal computer returns to raat the former settings set from the computer, and the = Ey nie setts scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing. Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-87 A 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions 7 4 Press the [CoveriJob Separator] key. = ettRo 1 Oise sem Ges IE ees... 1 mit soars eet 5 select the desired Coveridob Separator fea- ture, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + You cannot print on front covers, back covers, of job separator sheets. + You can cance! a mode by pressing the mode key again. eyes real spon Be tow B| i) Sy 6 Select the paper source for each insertion ‘sheet, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + Select the same paper size forthe front and back Covers and the job separator sheets. + The display will vary depending on the mode selected. oe ab Seer Ease sect nt Stan) (eur olf fe olf sur_o Fie Sree 4-58 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings7 Press the [Start Print] key. It there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. (See "Printing Documents Stored in the Box," on p.4-5,) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Cover/Job Separa- tor] and [Cancel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) + When you press the &2) key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. SLR O 1 me Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-59 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions . Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) You can make prints which can easily be made into a booklet. © mrortant + In the Booklet mode, combined use withthe Collate, Two-sided Printing, and Cover/Job Separator modes cannot be set. + You cannot set the Booklet mode fora record size other than LTR/ STMT. + Saddle stitching wil not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded. @ NOTE + When you want to print document for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the original withthe Booklet Scanning mode beforehand. (See “Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning)" on p.4-27) 1 specify the desired document with procedure below. [=] mp Select the desired box number, then the desired document map. f°" @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 Press the [Change P Settings] key. 3 Press the [Booktet] key. @ NOTE + When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu- ‘ment recorded from a personal computer returns to the former settings set from the compute, and the ‘scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing, 4-60 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings4 Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. © iwortant + The paper used for the cover page must be the same size as the other pages. + The paper used for the main text must be from 17 to 20-Io bond (64 g/m? to 80 g/t). + The paper used forthe cover page must not be heavier than 110-b index (200 g/m). + You cannot print onthe cover pages. + When you select the [Add Cover} key, ou cannot set the paper used forthe main text in the stack ‘bypass. @ NOTE + To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover) key. + Insert the paper forthe cover page inthe stack bypass. +11°X177 LTR: size paper can be selected. @ When you select the [Add Cover] key Select the type of paper, and press the [Nex!] key. Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when eee the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached es TAIT par aes one Esa) at Oe Por Twn fw a Co Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-61 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions r 5 select whether or not to saddle stitch the booklet, and press the [OK] key. © iweortant + The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad- dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. + When the number of sheets exceeds 15, the sta- ping will not be performed, and the sheets will be ‘output to the output tray @ NOTE + The available number of output sets in the saddle stitching s as follows: - Number of sheets Number of sets 5 25 sets 6-10 1S sets 11-45 10 sets + Saddle Stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet wil only be folded. 6 Press the [Start Print] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed (See ‘Printing Documents Stored in the Box," on p45.) @ NOTE + To cancel the setting, press the [Booklet] and [Can- cel] keys in that order. + To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings) key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) + When you press the & Key, the display returns to the Box selection screen yston voor 4-62 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings,Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) You can print multiple documents, such as scanned documents and documents sent from a computer etc. as one document. This mode enables you to combine documents with different settings as one document, so it is useful when you want to print documents as the following: - When printing and stapling data created with different softwares, or data made by multiple people as one document. = When printing paste-up or transparency originals and data sent from a computer as one document with the Booklet mode set. © imrortant + You can set this mode only wen you select mutiple documents + When you use this function to combine the documents, the settings for each document are cleared, and prints are made withthe Standard mode settings. When printing is completed, the settings of each docu- ‘ment return tothe settings set when stored. + You can change the settings ofthe Standard mode. (See “Setting 2 Standard Mode for Local Printing,"on i) 1. specity the desired box with procedure below. =] mp Select the desired box number @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2 spocity the documents in the order to be merged, and press the [Print] key. @ NOTE iia oe Vy + The selected documents are numbered in the order Swen | specified. + When you press the [Select All key, you can select ex, P= = J[Ee all documents in the box (The key changes to the ae ae {Clear Soecton key) EE “You can cancel he selection by pressing the docu. LS iment agai, a oo | «Iie you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can cancel a selection ofthe documents (The key changes to the (Select Ail] key). tosses Twa Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-63 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions ' 3 Press the [Change P Settings] key. Oe Ce ee Eamon 4 Press the [Merge Documents] key. Docirents semctod: © no Dee Ops es iat setegs i ston vento 5 Press the [Start Print] key. STORET aR If there is a current job or a previously reserved om | job, the machine will start printing after that job is. [2LTR D1 Lee completed. pr ory ae (See “Printing Documents Stored in the Box,” on —— p45) m=) J : =... Eo nar sctres @ Nom +The name of the printed document is displayed as “‘IName of first document] + [Number of other docu- L [pen ete ‘ments documents”. For example, if the name of the document speciied first is [First] and three ‘other documents were specified, [First + 3 docu- ‘ments] wil be displayed. + To cancel the settings, press the {Intial Settings} key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) + When you press the & key, the display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-64 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the SettingsPOCCRIIG Stored Document (Sample Print) You can print one set of print output when you want to check the image before printing, or when you want to check the settings and the Image data of the document stored in the box. © rortant + The [Sample Print] key only appears when you set the Collate or Staple mode. This key does not appear when the Group mode is set. In addition, when you select multiple documents, this key does not appear unless you set the Merge Documents mode. @ NOTE + You can make a sample print even when the number of print sets is one. 1. specity the desired document with procedure below. @ NOTE [==] mm Select the desired box number, then the desired document map + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. [Sample Print] key, and press the key. ‘Sample set printing starts and one print set is made, @ NOTE + The number of print is not changed even when the sample set is made, 3 check the printed paper, and press the [Start Print}, [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key. @ NOTE + To output the prints, press the [Start Print] key. + To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key. + To change the settings, press the [Change Set- tings) key. is:F iowa penta Some Prt ae te ren erat (ih ea tere sotegs, eet Cg Strate Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print) 465 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4 Using the Mail Box Functions @ When you select the [Change Settings] key: Change the desired settings, then press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + When you made a sample print without changing the settings, press the [Change P Settings] key, then change the settings. + To cancel the settings, press the [Ital Settings] key. (The machine returns tothe standard mode of the Local Printing.) Biotin form. [poe wre When selecting one document and printing without changing the settings Sa wT Es stigo 1 Or mee Ty rtm serene =) fig ene. __ rare When selecting one document and printing after changing the settings ae Der a tir Oo zi —_ ED iii We oe, ase reer When selecting multiple documents and printing after changing the settings 4, ress the [Start Print] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. (See ‘Printing Documents Stored in the Box,"on p. 4-5.) @ NOTE + When you want o check the changed settings, press the [Sample Print] key again. dE Fntbea neg See PrP iz i Li i] tae om ramen pens eeu nt tra ron etthgs, Se te Stas oF Be een. eaeme | 4-66 Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sampler)Checking the Document’s Detailed Information You can check the detailed information of documents stored in the box. 1 specity the desired document with procedure below. [5] =p Select the desired box number map Select the desired document @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high- lighted) document are displayed. 2 Press the [Details] key. san (eL 1 ammsizmr ove a wr 8 ea feear ote 3 check the detailed information, and press the oa [Done] key. rob Naber BOBO4 Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears ae oe again as Checking the Document's Detailed Information 4-67 4 Using the Mail Box Functions4. Using the Mail Box Functions Changing the Name of a Document You can change the name of a document stored in the box. 1 specity the desired document with procedure below. sap Select the desired box number mm Select the desired document @ NOTE When you select a box set wth a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + When you select mutile documents and press the [Details] key, only the details ofthe selected (high- lighted) document are displayed. 2 Press the [Details] key. Same aS wie | ovie wea | >) en e_e"_Yia ret —_ | Eno J 3 Press the (change document name] key. 68 Changing the Name of a Document4 Enter the document name that you want to change, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + For details on how to enter the characters, see "Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display," on p. 106. + The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name is 24 + You cannot store a document without a name. + If you want to cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. 5 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears again. asad im 504/ 80 2st) ocatertType> B San ce Changing the Name of a Document 4-69 4 Using the Mail Box FunctionsMoving a Document You can move a desired document to a different box. 1. specity the desired document with procedure below. [==] => Select the desired box number map Select the desired document @ NOTE * When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear Seigton key 2 Press the [Move Document] key. j aniotrons WE HA | mie ‘oir uid a |= document, 3 2 2 3 specity the box to which you want to move the 8 7 @ NOTE + You cannot move a document to muttiole boxes. 4-70 Moving a Document4 Press the [Start] key. The screen on the right appears. @ NOTE + fa document cannot be moved to the desired box, ‘a message telling you that you cannot move the document will be displayed. + Ifa document cannot be moved, it wll remain in the original box. + Ian error occurs while moving multiple documents, feet tere the number of documents which have been moved EEE is displayed. 5 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Box selection screen. Cw ee Moving a Document 471 4 Using the Mail Box FunctionsErasing a Document from a Box You can erase a document stored in a box. 1 specity the desired document with procedure below. <=] map Select the desired box number mm Select the desired document @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + It you press the [Select Al] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection) key). ) 2 Press the [Erase] key. 3 check the document, and press the [Yes] key. @ NOTE + If you do not want to erase the document, press the 50 ty eres the soca No} key. dedaant tore tad 4, Using the Mail Box Functions 4. Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Box selection screen. 4-72 Erasing a Document from a BoxPrinting Efficiently This chapter describes operations to make print jobs more efficient. Changing the Exposure During Printing. ........2222.00sseeeeeeeeees 52 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (lnerupt Mode) 53 Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up. 55 Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start). 55 Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Mact Warming Up (Auto Print).........cce-ccveeeeeee Reserving the Next Job during Printing... Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Com Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) .. Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs ............... eo 5-10 Checking and Changing Printing Status . 513 ‘Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents. 513 Canceling Printing : = 55 Priority Printing Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . Printing Secured Documents. . 5-20 Checking the Printing History . BeseeueueuAHABIS) Checking the Device Status. 22.2... e eee cece ee eetenennnnnee 1524 5-16 518 54 A 5 Printing EfficientlyW 5 Printing Efficiently Changing the Exposure During Printing You can change the copy or print exposure during printing. 1 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key on the right screen which appears during printing. ‘The printing exposure is changed. @ NOTE + Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark] keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to the right to make the exposure darker. ‘Sentra ad Be, ee amen In the Mail Box function When printing is completed, the display returns to the Basic Features screen if the last used function was the Copy function, or to the Box selection screen it it was the Mail Box function. € NOTE + Adjusting the exposure after printing has started will produce a diferent result from the result betore scanning the original 5-2 Changing the Exposure During PrintingCopies (Interrupt Mode) The Interrupt mode enables you to interrupt the reserved or current job long enough to make other ity copies. This mode is useful when making a rush copy during a long copy job. © eortant + When making interrupt copy while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, make copies without exchanging the control cards. @ NOTE + You can make interrupt copies ifthe machine is ready to scan. + You can set the modes for the Interrupt copy even while an original is being scanned into memory or into a box. irrupting the Current Job to Make Priority 1 Press the “@ key. The 'S key remains constantly lit. @ NOTE + When you want to copy after changing the Department ID while the Department ID Man- agement is enabled, press the © key and enter the Department ID and Password. (See “Entering the Department ID and Password; ‘on p. 10-4.) + Even when you press the key, the job currently being output will not be interrupted unti the inter- rupt copy starts. 2 Place your original, then set the necessary copy mode. : @ NOTE + You can cancel the Interrupt mode by pressing the S key. + You can cancel anly the copy mede by pressing the (& key. (The Interrupt mode will not be can can- celed) Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Coy loon itr o , 5 (interrupt Mode) 1 5. Printing EfficientlyVv 5 Printing Efficiently 3 Press the“) key. When the Interrupt copy job starts, the © key stops flashing. 4. once the original is scanned, remove it from the machine. © imrortant + When the interrupt copy job is completed, the inter- rupted printing operation restarts. + fyou want to continue the interrupt copy, wait until the current interrupt copy job is completed (end of printing) 5-4 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (ltenup Node)Even while the machine is warming up, an original can be scanned, or you can make print settings. © imeortant + Ifyou scan originals while the machine is warming up, the time for the machine to warm up will be longer. @ NOTE + Jobs can be reserved during the following status: = While the machine is warming up. = While the machine returns trom each energy-saving status. ~ While the machine is warming up after a maintenance, inspection, or troubleshooting job. Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) 1. Place your originals and select the desired copy mode. & NOTE + While the machine is warming up, you can reserve Lup to five copy jobs including the currently scan- ning original. However, an interrupt copy job is not counted. + You can set a aftferent mode for each job. 2 Press the () key. The message “Scanning... appears on the display. display shown on the right appears on the touch panel display, depending on the copy mode. To scan the next original, press the “% key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. @ NOTE + To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key on the touch panel display or the “® key. Reserving a Job whi Doesnt eae ‘Saree te rele es to Start ke Eo the Machine is Warming Up 5 Printing EfficientlyW 5 Printing Efficiently ing up, printing starts. 3 After the machine has finished wan @ NOTE + It warm up ends while scanning is stil in progress, printing starts at that point. + You can change the exposure during printing. (See *Changing the Exposure During Printing,” on p. 5-2.) Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) 1 specity the desired document with the procedure below. [==] mm Select the desired box number, then the desired document amp @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. 2. To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change set- _... CARRS tings before making a print, press the [Change pee P Settings] key and set the desired mode, then | == press the [Start Print] key. @ NOTE + To make a sample print, press the [Sample Print] key. (See “Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (SanplePi),"on p. 4-65.) * To erase the data atter printing, press the [Print and Erase] key. + To print after changing the settings, see “Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Set- tings," on p. 4-49. 5-6 Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming UpReserving the Next Job during Printing While the machine is printing, you can scan other originals or make print settings. You can print the reserved job as soon as the current job is completed, so that you can reduce the time and effort needed to scan the originals. @ NOTE + You can reserve up to five copy jabs for the Copy function including the current job. For the Mail Box func- tion, you can reserve up to 32 documents regardless of the number of reserved jobs. However, interrupt copy jabs are not counted. + You can sat a different mode for each job. Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy) © iweortanr + When reserving a copy job while the user restrictions are enabled with the contro! card, do not remove that control card after that job is completed. If you remove the control card during printing, the job reserva- tion will be canceled, 1. Press the [Done] key on the right screen which appears during printing. core Derry @ NOTE + Ifthe ob displayed in the touch panel isthe job of functions other than the Copy function, press the f=] key to olsplay the Basic Features screen 2 Place your originals on the platen glass or in the feeder and set the desired copy mode. Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-7 A 5 Printing Efficienthvv 5 Printing Efficiently 3 Press the nals. € NOTE + Ifthe screen on the right appears, press the [OK] key and repeat the operation after the current job is completed. Reserving the Next Job during Printing 1 fe tats cn Oe ae cS at cd Sigh Ten by aReserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) 1 Press the (Donel key. @ NOTE + Ifthe jb displayed in the job monitor is tho job of functions other than the Mail Box function, press Fs the f=] key to display the Box selection screen, aaa ee ee bf 0) I Cee) (Ce 2 specify the desired document with the procedure below. ‘Select the desired box number, then the desired document -> Prat @ NOTE + When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. + Ifthe Box selection screen appears after step 1, specity the desired box number. + To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change settings before ‘making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode. 3 Press the [Start Print] key. a BwOOTTCRT entes Ss Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-9) 5 Printing Efficiently5 Printing Efficiently Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs ‘When paper is fed from the stack bypass for the current print job or for a reserved job, you can des- ignate the paper to be placed in the stack bypass for the next reserved job. 1 Press the [StackBypass Setting] key on the Paper Selection screen that appears when set- ting reserved print settings. ‘When there is no reserved print job, you can designate the paper size by pulling it out and re- inserting It [Peer Sant) coc Te ps ae A em 0 aor 0 ono fea oO eo 0 2 Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To select Aor B series paper size, press the [VE- size] key. 3 select the paper type, and press the [OK] key. Sa ee ree 9 a |e | Se Boeri es > Cone = (= 9 5-10 Using the Stack Bypass while Reser Print Jobs‘The paper sizes previously set and the last set are displayed as shown in the screen on the right. Paper size loaded presently Paper size selected [Por Seamer ee At euro ik 0 Baio Tate aeait o aoe frets 4 Press the [Done] key. Finish the reserved print settings. for foc Sct Te per @owim 0 amu eT oO faa oO 5 press the “() key. @ NOTE + When reserving jobs of the Mail Box function, press the [Start Print} key. Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs 51 5 Printing Efficiently6 set the specified paper when its turn comes to print. @ NOTE + The specified paper size is displayed when its turn ‘comes to print. 7 Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB- size] key. 8 select the paper type, and press the [OK] key. The machine starts printing. 5 Printing Efficiently Oe (ae BD fore 5-12 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print JobsChecking and Changing Printing Status You can check and change the printing status (Stand-by, Printing, etc.) using the System Monitor screen. Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents 1 Press the [System Monitor] key. 2 Select the {Copy] or [Print] key. @ NOTE + When checking the print status for copy jobs, press the [Copy] key. + When checking the print status forall jobs, pross the [Pri key. 100% Auto Ne ae Ah. sank hoary KH SOE Bo aun guur 9 gem oO! geum 0 goin 6] 3 select the [status] key. Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-13 5 Printing Efficiently5. Printing Efficiently 4. select the document you want to check the detailed information for and press the [Det key. @ NOTE + The status of each icon displayed in the screen are as follows. Operating — Waiting est Error Paused Canceling Secured job Copy job Mail Box job Printer job Report job IOeOD*e Oey 5 check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key. Repeating this operation returns the display to the Basic Features screen. Details of a Box document 5-14 Checking and Changing Printing StatusCanceling P' 100%, 1 Press the [System Mo! é imma 2 select the [Copy] or [Print] key. @ NOTE + When checking the print status for copy jobs, press the [Copy] key. + When checking the print status forall jobs, press the [Print key. Bu main] seco Sm Bor Qasw o| porn 3 Bein DL 3 select the status] key. 4 select the documento be canceled, and press the [Cancel] key. @ NOTE + You cannot select multiple documents and cancel them all none action Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-15 5 Printing Efficiently5 Printing Efficiently 7 5 Press the [Yes] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key. +The canceled document is displayed as ‘NG" on the Print Log screen. 6 Press the [Done] key. Repeating this operation returns the display to the Basic Features screen. Priority Printing @ NOTE + When you set the priority printing, the machine starts printing it after the currently printing document is completed. 1 Press the [System Monitor] key. ara 5-16 Checking and Changing Printing Status2 Press the [Print] key. 3 select the [status} key. 4 solect the document for priority printing and press the [Print Next] key. 5 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-17 5 Printing EfficientlyVv 5 Printing Efficiently Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer ‘You can temporarily stop the print job sent from a computer, or skip an error when a print error occurs. 1 ross the [system Monitor] key. 2. Press the [Print] key. ‘ater Be al. fey 55 Bo we ttr7O | amon Sta Guu 9 gato goin O gem 0 3 select the [status] key. 5-18 Checking and Changing Printing Status4 select the desired document, and press the [Details] key. Pertea 5 Press the [¥] key. Perform operations of the print job. some ‘When you finish operating the document, press. ee >eprme the [Done] key. ra Print bs @ NOTE + When you press the [Pause] key, printing stops temporarily, and the key changes to the [Resume] key. When you press the [Resume] key, printing restarts. + You can continue the print job even when a print error occurred, by pressing the [Auto Continue] key, depending on the type of error. However, the pint output may not be the same as expected. + When printing is canceled from the computer or when the data is less than the volume of one page, that job may not be correctly performed. When you Ee press the [Form Feed) key, you can force the print data remaining in memory to be output. 6 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-19 5 Printing EfficientlyPrinting Secured Documents You can print documents with a password sent from a computer. Documents with a password are called secured documents. Secured documents waiting to be printed are displayed with a & mark at the left of the job number. ‘To print these documents, you need to enter a password, which prevents other people who do not, know the password from observing the contents. ©) iwrortant + Ifthe main power is tured OFF. the secured documents are erased. + The secured document willbe erased after the printing is completed. + You cannot change the settings of the secured document. 1. Press the [System Monitor] key. 2 Press the [Print] key. 3 select the [status] key. 5-20 Checking and Changing Printing Status4 Sctect the desired secured document, and press the [Secured Print] key. 5 Enter a password, and press the [OK] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. 1 ero ays 0 eter © wrortant + Enter the same password set in the operation from the computer. The machine becomes ready to print the document. = @ NOTE Sty eh. + To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key. LL Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-21 A 5 Printing Efficiently5 Printing Efficiently Checking the Printing History 1 Press the [system Monitor] key. = 100%. Auto 2 Press the [Print] key. um D Bes Bech 0 met BL 3 Press the [Log] key. 4 Press the [Job Type] key. 5-22 Checking and Changing Printing Status5 select the type of job that you want to check the log. @ NOTE + The [Printer] key is olsplayed only when the net- work printer function is enabled. 6 After checking the printing job history, press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen, @ NOTE + When the document has been printed correctly, “OK*is shown. NG"is shown for documents of which printing has been canceled. +n the Log, the printing ob history of up to 40 docu- ‘ments can be displayed. @When you select the [Details] key: The screen on the right appears Cheek the detailed information, and press the [Done} key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again, Dyan san 9:18 >eoore ream Sort one ‘Checking and Changing Printing Status 5:23 A 5 Printing Efficiently5 Printing Efficiently Checking the Device Status ‘You can check the amount of paper remaining in each paper drawer, the remaining memory available, the location of a paper jam, and so on. 1 Press the [System Monitor] key. 2 select the [Device] key. 100% au Bestii7 | sfocowry Steos Boum 9 mei O Bein 0 asim 0 3 > Atter checking the device status, press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen, @ NOTE + The [Paper Jams}, [Staple Loading], [Staple Jams], {Adding Toner} or [Punch Waste] key appears ‘below the “Recovery Steps", depending on each status. When you press each key, the display ‘shows how to remove the jammed paper, how to add toner, etc. 5-24 — Checking and Changing Printing Status Tot ferry 95x Hear Gour J eu oD! ascr 0 aun Ol_ Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs This chapter describes the initial settings and how to change them to suit your needs. Additional Functions Settings Table . Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function Gone Setings). Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . seve eens Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone. Setting Inch Input. . .. : Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching ....... 6-10 Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer a 612 Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . 614 Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Ma + 61S Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. 2615 istinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . 616 Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. .... 617 Setting the Printing Priority +618 Seiting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass 2619 Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing. 6-21 Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults... 0... c.cccccecsesss se 6°23 Setting the Timer (Tiner Setings) 6-24 Setting the Current Date and Time +624 Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations = 625 Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations... 0... cee ceeeeeee ee veveeeeteeesetesteteeeneeeseees 6-26 Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task... +627 Setting the Time That the Unit's Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week . 6-28 Setting the Low-Power Mode Time 629 Adjusting the Machine (AdustmentCleaning) eee eee cece cece cece 6-30 Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Ocour. oe 6-30 Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher. 6-31 Changing the Saddle Stitch Position ...... 6-32 Adjusting the Standard Exposure : ; 6.33 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function en Setings) . 6-34 Setting Standard Keys. ; Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off ...... Setting Image Orientation Priority to On Off 637 Setting the Job Duration Display ‘Auto Orientation to On/ Off 64 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function + 6-40 Changing the Current Standard Settings ...... +641 Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . 6-44, Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mal Box Setings) 6-45 Setting/ Storing the Box .... 6-45, Initializing @ Box TT e-aa Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function + 650 Setting the Standard mode for Scanning ...............0+ 6-51 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings). 6-54 Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password.................... 6-54 Setting the Department ID Management : 6-57 Setting Device Information........ 6-69 Erasing a Message Board 6-69 Printing the Report .........0.0cceheeeee eee 671 Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . 671 6-2Additional Functions Settings Table The following items can be stored or set in the Common Settings screen. (* indicates factory default setting) @ NOTE + In addition tothe modes listed below, the [Printer Settings], [Network Settings), and [Remote UI On/Ott] ‘medes are displayed whan the network printar function is enabled. + For details ofthe following settings, refer tothe instruction manual forthe relevant function. = [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.) ~ [Remote Ul On/Off (See the Remote UI User's Guide.) ~ [Network Settings] (See tne Network Guid.) ‘Additional Function ‘Available settings Foglia | Common Set gS re | Initial Function Copy'/ Mail Box P66 Set "System Monitor Screen’ as initial tunetion: On’ off Set [Device] as the default for “System Monitor’: On*/ off ‘Auto Clear Setting Initial Function’/ Selected Function Pd ‘Audible Tones Entry Tone/ Error Tone/ Job Done Tone pee (All On"/0f) Inch Entry On’? Off p6o Drawer Eligibility For Copy’! Printer/ Mail Box/ Other p.6-10 APS) ADS {Stack bypass: On/ Off", Drawers: On*/ Of) Copy: Consider Paper Type: On’ Off” ‘Store Paper Type Paper drawer (1, 2), Paper Deck p.612 Plain’/ Heavy/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterheads Bond! 3-Hole Punch Paper drawer (3, 4) Plain’/ Recycled! Color! Letterhead/ Bond 3-Hole Punch _ 7 Energy Saver Mode =10%"/ ~25%/ ~80%I None p.614 Function Key Wake Up | On/ Off _ p.615 Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode | Low’/ High p.615 LTRR/STMT Original Selection | Distinguish Manually/ Use LTRR Format’7 p16 Use STMT Format Tray Designation Tray A: Copy’/ Printer/ Other™ pi? ‘Tray B: Copy’/ Printer*/ Other? Printing Priority 1:Copy (Priority) 2:Printer/ 3:Other p18 Standard Stack Bypass Settings | On/ Off p.619 Additional Functions Settings Table 63 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-4 ‘Additional Function ‘Available settings apples) Baae Standard Local Print Seis] Paper Select: Auto"/ Select paper supply p.6-2t Copies: 1° to 2,000 sets Finisher: -With the Finisher Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate"/ Group! Offset Group’ Staple (Corner (TopLett/ BimLett ‘TopRight/ BimRight), Double (Left/Right) + With the FinishersPuncher Unit-B1 Do not Collate/ Collate’ Offset Collate"/ Group! Offset Group’ Staple (Comer (TopLety/ BtmLefv TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Let/ Right)/ Hole Punch ~With the Copy Tray-C3 Do not Collate/ Collate"/ Rotate Collating! Group! Rotate Grouping ‘Two-sided Print : On/ Ott” Erase Document After Printing : Oni Off" Merge Documents: On/ Oft* inifialize Common Settings | inialize 6.23 Timer Setting: Date & Time Settings Default setting (12-digit number) p.6-24 Time Zone Settings: GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00, (Gm-5:00") ‘Summertime Settings: On/ Ort” ‘Change Auto Sleep Time 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min. p.625 4 hour*, 90 min., 2, , 4 hours _ Change Auto Clear Time O (no setting), 1 10 9 min,, 2 min.* p.626 Time Until Unit Quiets Down | 0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 1 min.” p.6:27 Daily Timer Settings ‘Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in 6-28 one-minute increments Low Power ModeTime 40, 15*, 20, 80, 40, 50 min., p.6-29 + hour, 90 min. 2,3, 4 hours Zoom Fine Adjustment X/Y:0", 1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments |p. 6-30 Saddle Stitcher Staple Press the [Start] key. p.631 Repositioning Saddle Stitch Position =2.0 mm to +2.0 mim (0 mm*) in 0.25 mm inerements| p. 6-32 ‘Adjustment i Exposure Recalibration Steps, 5 p. 6:33 Feeder Cleaning Press the [Stan] key. p. 8:30 Wire Cleaning Press the [Stan] k 831 Additional Functions Settings Table‘Additional Function ‘Available settings Ropes pase Standard Key 1,2 Settings | All modes (No setting’) 9.636 | Auto Collate ‘On'/ Off 636 Image Orientation Priory ‘On/Off - p.637 Job Duration Display ‘On/Off ee ‘Auto Orientation On" OFF, p.6:39 | Photo Mode On/Off p.6-40 Standard Setings ‘Store, Init B. Box SevStore 41 Initialize Copy Settings Initialize ‘ 6-44 ‘Number: 0 to 99) Store Name: 24 characters max. Password: 7 digit number max. Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 9, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3°, 7, 30 days, 0 (no limit) Initialize p. 6-45 | Photo Mode On/ OFF p.6-50 ‘System Manager Settings System Manager: 32 characters max. System Manager ID: 7 digit number max. System Password: 7 digit number max. E-mail Address: 64 characters max. Contact information: 32 characters max. Comment: 32 characters max. ‘Standard Scan mr Store, initialize 6-51 6-54 Department ID Management Department ID Management: On/ Off* (Store Dept. ID/Password, Print Totals, Accept Jobs with unknown ID: On*/ Off) Device Info Satiings Device Name: 32 characters Location: 32 characters Ciear Message Board User's Data List Erase p.6-69 Print p.6-71 Additional Functions Settings Table 65 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) E@ NOTE + The Common Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [¥] and [1] keys to scrollto the desired screen and make the required settings. + When the [¥] or [a] key should be pressed, the indication itm is aisplayed in this manual. Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON ‘You can specify which screen to display, when you turn ON the main power. The System Monitor screen also can be specified. @ NOTE + The default settings as follows: + Select Initial Function: Copy + Set "System Monitor Screen’ as inital function: Off + Set [Device] as the default fr ‘System Monitor’: On 1 Call up the desired screen as follows: “oS key ap {Peon Set —), 2 select the [Copy] or {Mail Box] key, and press the [OK] key. [BE (inter Fact @When you select the [Copy] key: The Copy Basic Features screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear. When you select the [Mail Box] key: The Mail Box selection screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear. When using the System Monitor screen as initial screen: Select the [On] key, and press the [OK] key. The ‘System Monitor screen is displayd when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear. @ NOTE + When you do not want to set the Device window as a dofauit window in the System Monitor screen, press the (Ot key and press the [OK] key. When ‘you select the [Off] key, the Copy window is set as the default window. 6-6 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Conon Stings)3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear Gives you the choice of whether or not to display the screen set by this function after Auto Clear has taken place. @ NOTE + The time delay for Auto Clear can be set. (See “Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Soreen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-26.) + The detautt setting is “ital Function’. 1. caltup the desired screen as follows: 2S ey > EE] ome MSE, 2 select the [intial Function] or [Selected Func- tion] key, and press the [OK] key. @When you select the [Initial Function] key: The screen set under intial Function is dis- ae played after Auto Clear has taken place. For example, if Copy is set under Initial Function and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the Copy Basic Features screen. ‘When you select the [Selected Function] key: The display returns to the screen that was dis- played before Auto Clear takes place. For example, even if Copy is set under Initial Func- tion and Auto Clear takes piace after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the Mail Box selection screen 3 > Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings) 6-7 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v Needs Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone Gives you the choice of whether or not to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the following times: Entry Tone: When pressing keys on the contro! panel or keys in the touch panel display Error Tone : When a maifunction occurs (e.g. paper jam or operational error) Job Done Tone: After the last copy has been made (e.g. outputting or stapling is completed) @ NOTE +The default setting is “On” forall tones. 1 Caltup the desired screen as follows: © key ep PSs] mmm ate Toes 2 Select the {On] or [Off] keys for “Entry Tone”, “Error Tone” and “Job Done Tone”, and press the [OK] key. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-8 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings)Setting Inch Input You can display the keys for entering values in inches in the numeric entry screen. @ NOTE + The default setting is “On”. 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: “oO key mma AY 2 select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] Cae Se 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings) 69 Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your 9 Needs Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching The paper drawers to be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching can be set. This setting can be made independently for Copy, Mail Box, and other functions. It is useful when different paper drawers are to be used for different purposes. @ NOTE + Paper drawers set to On are used for the following functions: + Auto Paper Selection (APS) :The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper drawer forthe size of the original and the set ratio. - Auto Drawer Switching (ADS) : Ita paper drawer runs out of paper during a continuous printing job, the ‘machine automatically selects another paper drawer with the same ‘paper size and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer. + The default settings are *Oft”for the stack bypass and “On forthe paper drawers (1 0 4). 1c “oO” key > say, SY For 05/05, ll up the desired screen as follows: 2 select the [Copy], [Mail Box), [Printer] or <= [Other] key. eo Egy Fer 0S) & NOTE fr Peer + You can select the [Printer] and [Other] keys only | when the network printer function is enabled. == —— + The [Other] key is pressed when setting the paper drawers to be reported withthe report printing. ster voto 6-10 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Funetion (Common Setings)3 select the [On] or [Off] key for the stack bypass and each paper drawer, and press the [OK] key. @ When you select the [On] key: Makes the paper drawer eligible for APS/ ADS. @ When you select the [Off] key: Makes the paper drawer ineligible for APS/ ADS. @ NOTE + When you select the [Copy] key, you can select whether or nat to set priority to paper type. + Ifyou set the [Consider Paper Type] key to On, ‘paper will not be fed even when paper runs out during printing, unless other loaded papers suit he size and stored type. For details of stored pacer types, see “Identitying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,"on p. 6-12. + It you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to Ort paper will be fed from another paper drawer when Paper runs out during printing, if the same paper size is loaded in that paper drawer. + When you select the [Printer] key, the Stack bypass icon @ is not displayed. + The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol lowing places. ‘When you select the [Copy] key. FEistack bypass iPaper Drawer 1 ee 1, EaPaper Drawer 2 we ——F- Paper Drawer 3 [Rey EaPaper Drawer 4 Paper Deck (option) 4 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings) 6-1 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsIdentifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer You can store the paper type loaded to each paper drawer. 1 catiup the desired screen as follows: co 2 select the paper drawer for which you want to store the paper type. = ste eter 3 select the paper type loaded in the paper en! drawer, and press the [OK] key. ste rawr @ Note ae a) + Load the same type of paper as set in each paper fe Bim Be Ol drawer. ee + For details of paper types, see ‘Available Paper [een Stock,"0n p. 1-17. + The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol oe lowing places. [eter wow yer Drawer 1 Com I Tp BPaper Drawer 2 EiPaper Drawer 3 IPaper Drawer 4 ‘EaPaper Deck (option) Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your " 6-12 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Stings)4 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. @ NOTE + The paper types stored hare are displayed when selecting paper in each mode, as shown on the right Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) 6-13 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your ay Needs Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting ‘You can change the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power consumed by the machine, @ NOTE + The default setting is “-10%". 1. caltup the desired screen as follows: oo — =] ee ern 2 Select the [-10%}, -25%4], [-50%] or [None] key, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + The approximate energy savings figures for each mode and the approximate delay times from power ON to ready to print status are listed below. ~ -10% mode : 10% less power (approx. 50 sec)" + -25% mode : 25% less power (approx. 90 sec.)" - ~50% mode : 50% less power (approx. 180 sec.)* - None 2% less power (approx. 0 sac.)* * The figures in parenthesis ( ) show the approxi- ‘mate time it takes for the machine to return to the ready to print status. (get wnt 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-14 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings)Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine You can set the [=], [==], and [=] keys as the keys to reactivate the machine from the Energy Saver mode. @ NOTE + The detault setting is “Off”, 1 cali up the desired screen as follows: Key comm PTS | catia Foggy Te co 2 select the fon} or [Off] key, and press the [OK] = key. Tact ey moa) 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode You can set the amount of energy consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode. @ NOTE + Ifeither the [Function Key Wake Up], (AppleTalk Settings), or [NetWare Settings] is set to “On, the energy consumption when the machine enters the Sleep mode is ‘High’ regardless of this setting. For details of the NetWare Settings and AppleTalk Settings, see the Network Guide. + The default setting is “Low”. 1. caitup the desired screen as follows: “OS” key mp Se] ce Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings) 6-15 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v Needs 2. Select the [Low] or [High] key, and press the —————_ [OK] key. [BD (Energy Concunption Wn Slap ¥o28) | 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals When scanning LTRR size or STMT size originals set on the platen glass, you can make a setting to either distinguish the original sizes manually, or to scan originals of only one of these sizes. @ NOTE + The default setting is “Use LTAR Format’. 1 call up the desired screen as follows: “oO” key om (STS | ec YR Gare 2 select the [Distinguish Manually), [Use LTRR ———— Format] or [Use STMT Format] key, and press (io the [OK] key. @When you select the [Distinguish Manually] key: a if you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the Ex | a platen glass, a display to select the original size appears when scanning. @When you select the [Use LTRR Format] key: _ (tees it you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the ete or platen glass, the machine detects it as LTRR- size original @ When you select the [Use STMT Format] key: If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, the machine detects it as STMT- size original. 6-16 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Funetion (Common Setings)3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function You can select the function for which each output tray of the Finisher-F'1 (option) or the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is to be used. © iwrortant «This function cannot be set whem the Finisher-F1 or the Saddle Finisher-F2 isnot attached. @ NOTE + The default settings are as folows: - Tray A: Copy, Printer, Other - Tray B: Copy, Printer, Other + [tis possible fo assign a single tay to multiple functions. + We recommend attaching the supplied labels to the trays for identifying their respective use. Blank labels are also provided which you can fil out yourselt. 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: “oO” key amen [Son] sama, Pesoton 2 select the functions of dedicated output trays ‘Aand B, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + You can select the [Printer] key only when the net- work printer function is enabled. + Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as “Other + When the paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray while both trays are set as the designated tray = fora certain function, the machine automatically ‘changes the output tray to other available tray. + When you want to seta tray as the designated tray for only a certain function, select only that function. [Ed ay dss) 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Fun 6-47 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting the Printing Priority You can set the printing priority. A job that is set to a high priority is printed preferentially after the job currently being performed @ NOTE + The dofautt settings are as folows: + Copy: (Prony) + Printer: 2 + Other:3 (1, 2 and 3 indicate priority sequence.) + Prionty printing will nt take place even when you set the highest priority until the current job is completed. However ifthe current jab is paused, printing of the job from a function with higher prianty may be started depending on the settings set 1. cattup the desired screen as follows: “@” key emma ETS | melee Fe ety om 2 select the printing priority, and press the [OK] key. (ED renra rrantyr Setting [1] sets the highest printing priority @ NOTE + You can select the [Printer] key only when the net- ‘work printer function is enabled. + Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as ‘Others’ + When the same printing prionty has been set for ‘multiple functions, printing starts from whichever of the functions is set to print fist. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-18 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Funetion (Common Setings)Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass You can set the standard mode for the paper to be loaded in the stack bypass. @ NOTE +The default setting is “Of” 1. caltup the desired screen as follows: “oe hey > aay So So Oe tre 2 Select the [On] or [Off] key. @ NOTE + When you select the [On) key, the mode returns to the stored standard paper mode when you press the ¢; key or after Auto Clear has taken place. @When you select the [Off] key: Proceed to step 3. @ When you select the [On] key: Press the [Store] key. Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B- size] key. ions that are Common to Each Function (Common Satings) ister voto RO nxt 7] [Star a 6-19 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsSelect the paper type, and press the [OK] key. 3 press the [0K] key. 4 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your ¥ 6-20 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings)Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing The machine prints documents with the standard Local Print settings set here when printing documents in the Mail Box without changing the settings set when documents were scanned, or when printing documents sent from a personal computer after pressing the [Change P Settings] key. It also prints with the standard Local Print settings when you merge documents. + Paper Select (Paper source) *Copies + Finisher -With the Finisher Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate"/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft’ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right)) -With the FinishersPuncher Unit-B1 Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate"/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLett/ BtmLeft’ ‘TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/ Hole Punch -With the Copy Tray-C3 Do not Collate/ Collate’/ Rotate Collate/ Group/ Rotate Group + Two-sided Print (On/ Off) + Erase Document After Printing (On/ Off) + Merge Documents (On/ Off) @ NOTE + The default settings are as follows: A ~ Paper Select Auto Copies w Finisher Offset Collate (With the Finisher) Two-sided Print ‘Off - Erase Document After Printing : Off ‘Merge Documents :0ff 1c “Sk —/ omit S0ES a ee up the desired screen as follows: 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Fun 6-21Vv 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 2 set each mode. © Paper Select Select the paper source. © Copies Set the number of copies from 1 set to 2000 sets. @ Finisher Set the type of collating. @ Two-sided Print Set whether or not to perform two-sided print- ing. @ Erase Document After Printing Set whether or not to erase the document after printing. @ Merge Documents ‘Set whether or not to merge documents when you select multiple documents. [i (stoniee taal ree Stree [EE tear ices eet Stine Tea FRE 3 Once you have completed all settings, press the [Done] key. 4 ress the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-22 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults This function allows you to return the common settings to their defaults (initial settings). 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: OT key ep EE] cae HH 2 select the [Yes] key. = @ NOTE ‘iti + To cancel intalzaton, select the [No] key 10 tet ij Errore This screen is displayed for about two seconds. ——— a | J = Frenne 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Setings) 6-236 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your W Needs Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) @ NOTE + The Timer Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [¥] and [A] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. + When the [¥ or [a] key should be pressed, the incication --=lEiEimaay is cisplayed in this manual. Setting the Current Date and Time Sets the current date and time. The date and time set here is also used as the time st for functions for which the time can be set. required 1. caltup the desired screen as follows: state ror ae tgp at Oo key mp PE comm 8 SE =) 2 Enter the current date (year, month, day) and ——— time with the Numeric keys ((@)-()), and [EB Bote « toe Settros] Us te mere bers press the [OK] key. coves 2001 15:00 Ree | @ Note & ay + Enter the date as four digits without a space. [mses anor isin] tee = Example: March 25 -> 0325 + Enter all the four digits for the year. + Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space. = Example: 7:05 a.m.» 0705 11:18 p.m. > 2318 + Ifyou make a mistake when entering values, press the key, and enter the values again starting with the year @When setting the Time Zone Settings: = Press the [Time Zone Settings] key, then select (GE (ine ee estes) the time zone where the machine is located. Bee a] UMass ae Then press the [OK] key. es fate, ote @ NOTE Sri GR + Press the [¥] or [Al] key to sorol he ist. “The default seting is “GMT-5:00" _ Central time (US Canada) :GMT-5:00 Eastern time (US Canada) :GMT-6:00 eran ene ‘Mountain time (US Canada) ;GMT-7:00 Pacific time (US Canada) :GMT-8:00 6-24 Setting the Timer (Tiner Stings)@ When setting the Summertime Settings: — Press the [Summertime Settings] key, then [ED cate Serer press the [On] key. Enter the dates for both the Start Date and End Date with the Numeric keys (@-®), and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + The defautt setting is "Ott + When you set the Summertime, the machine auto- ‘matically sets the standard time of the machine ‘one-hour forward. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Opera- tions If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the control panel Power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine then enters the Sleep mode. @ NOTE +The default setting is “t hour’. 1 caltup the desired screen as follows: “or ey — 2 Enter the desired Auto Sleep Time with the [¥] = or [4] key, and press the [OK] key. (Change Auto Sleep Thee] The Auto Sleep Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 hours (in one-hour increments). copy gm 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting the Timer (Timer Setings) 6-25 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the display returns, to the Basic screen (Standard setting) of the selected function. This time is called “Auto Clear Time”. Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. Auto Clear Time can also be set to “Off” @ NOTE + The default setting is *2 minutes". + When *0"is set, Auto Clear function isnot set 1 call up the desired screen as follows: Coy —) ap igo Te 2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric —S keys ((@)-(@)) or [-] and [+] keys, and press = ByOwree hate Gear Teed the [OKT key- The Auto Clear Time settings are from 0 to 9 ah 2he minutes (in one-minute increments). oo Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-26 Setting the Timer (Timer Setings)Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specified amount of time has elapsed following a print job or after a key has been pressed. On this screen you can specify the amount of time that must elapse prior to entering the Quiet mode. @ NOTE + The default setting is "1 minute" + When ‘0”is set, the Quiet mode is not set. 1 caltup the desired screen as follows: oy — =] —) tu ue austs toe, Coa 2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric keys ((@)-(@)) or [-] and [+] keys, and press the [OK] key. The Quiet mode settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments). 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again Setting the Timer (Timer Satings) 6-27 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Differ- ent Days of the Week You can set the time that the machine is automatically turned OFF for each day of the week. + Setting range: Daily from Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one-minute increments @ NOTE + The default setting is “no setting’ + When Auto Clear Time and Daily Timer are both set, Auto Clear Time has priority. 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: “Sey 4 a 2 Select the day of the week, enter the time with the Numeric keys ((0)-(8)), and press the [0K] key. @ NOTE + Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space. - Example: 7:05 a.m. > 0705 14:18 pam. ~> 2318 + Ifyou make a mistake when entering the time, choose the day of the week again, then enter a four-digit number. + Ifyou do not want to specity the time, press the & key 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-28 Setting the Timer (Timer Setngs)Setting the Low-Power Mode Time If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. You can easily change the time for the machine to enter the Low-Power mode. @ NOTE + The default setting is “15 minutes” Call up the desired screen as follows: “OS key cmap [RT ee ad ftecord 2 select the Low-Power Mode Time by pressing the [¥] or [4] key, and press the [OK] key. BD ors Tar The Low-Power Mode Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 hours (in one-hour increments). 3. Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again Setting the Timer (Timer Setings) 6-29 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs:6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) @ NOTE + The Adjustment/Oleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [¥] and [4] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. “When the ['¥] or [a] key should be pressed, the indication =a is displayed in this manual. Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur ‘When you print a copy or a document in a box, if a slight difference ocours between the size of the original image and the size of the print image, you can perform fine adjustment so as to reduce this error. 1 Caltup the desired screen as follows: Coo — ee 2 Press the [-] or [+] key to adjust the percent- a age (%), and press the [OK] key. joo Fre Adjustaent] The adjustment range for both the X (left-right ao * (OOk ao direction) and the Y (up-down direction) is from pee! [+] =1.0 % to +1.0.% in 0.1 % increments. anion cau, a0 @ NOTE iat wi’ (=f + + You can check the adjustment result by pressing = sm the “t= key during adjustment when setting for the Copy function. 3 Press the [Done] key. he Basic Features screen appears again. Repeat this u 6-30 Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment Cleaning)Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher After a staple jam in the Saddle Finisher Unit has been cleared or staples are loaded in the Saddle Finisher, this function feeds paper to the unit and staples a few times, so that staples will be immediately available for the next job. © weortant + This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached. @ NOTE + The required paper is fed automatically. + The foliowing paper sizes can be used for this function: 11°x17'/ LTRR. 1 call up the desired screen as follows: GO key comma EET] my, st Se at 2. Press the [Start] key. @ NOTE + To cancel the staple repositioning, press the [Can- cal] key. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your a Adjusting the Machine (AdustmeniGlaning) 6-31 Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your y Needs Changing the Saddle Stitch Position When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached, slight position differences in the saddle stitch position may occur. You can compensate for such differences. © imrortant + This function cannot be set when the Sadale Finisher-F2 is not attached. 1 Catt up the desired screen as follows: “oe key —- “mmm 808 ST tn pete —) 2 Select the paper size for which you want to —== = change the saddle stitch position. [fb Osco seten aren sant) @ NOTE toe + Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be available in certain countries. 3 Use the [¥] and [4] keys to adjust the saddle stitch position, and press the [OK] key. Ben The setting range is from -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments. ‘The example shows adjustment for 11"x17"-size paper. 4 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-32 Adjusting the Machine (AdjustmentClearing)Adjusting the Standard Exposure Adjusts the exposure adjustment scale to calibrate differences in exposure. Perform this adjustment if differences between the image in the original and the print occur when printing an original free from smudges or dirty marks with the exposure scale set in the middle. @ NOTE + The default setting is °5” 1 cattup the desired screen as follows: “key roman FH Hestin 2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] keys to adjust the exposure, and press the [OK] key. 3. Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. ——————— ‘Adjusting the Machine (Adjustmen/Gleaning) 6-33 Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Settings) @ NOTE + The Copy Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [W] and [A] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. + When the [or [a\] Key should be pressed, the indication --=mi&idimenp is displayed in this manual. Setting Standard Keys You can store up to two Standard keys from the Copy Ratio, Finisher and Two-sided Mode keys on the Basic Features screen, the keys in the Special Features screen, or the memory keys containing copy jobs stored in the Mode Memory. 1. cattup the desired screen as follows: “oO” cy — mmm SEL Ht co 2 Press the [¥] or [4] key and press the group — of the function that you want to store as your Sweet Gwe] favorite key. ons 3 sclect the desired mode to be stored as a ‘Standard key, and press the [OK] key. a [Btanoarc_ er 1 Settings) 6-34 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings)4. Press the {Done} key. Seine Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again Bomee seell tae] a P| Example: Standard keys 1 and 2 are displayed in the touch panel display as shown on the right Standard key 2 Standard key 1 oe Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings) 6-35 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs198 to Suit Your 6 Setting and Adjusting Common S¢ Needs Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off This function allows automatic selection of the Collate (Offset Collate) mode when the original is placed in the feeder. This is helpful when making multiple copies, because the user does not need to remember to select the Finisher mode. @ NOTE + When Auto Collate is set to "On" with the Finisher (option) attached, the Offset Collate mode will be set Without any output option attached, the Collate mode wil bo set + The default setting is "On". 1 call up the desired screen as follows: “St ey ep SA] cme 2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. —_ 6-36 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Saings)Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off The orientation of the image may be printed conversely depending on the copy mode set. You can set whether or not to copy the image in the same direction as the original. @ NOTE + The default setting is “Of” + When the Image Orientation Priority is On’, the first copy time will take longer. 1 Cait up the desired screen as follow: GS Key cemmmam SES] emmy HE Gettin rity co 2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] ; key. [Eb tem ronan aT 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings) 6-37 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting the Job Duration Display When the Job Duration Display is set to “On’, the time remaining until completion of the copy job (Job Duration Time) is indicated in minutes in the touch panel display. (The job duration time is not displayed for some copy modes.) @ NOTE + The default setting is “Of” + The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, CoveriSheet Insertion, Different ‘Size Originals, Rotate Collting, and Rotate Grouping modes or when the copy waiting time is less than ‘one minute, 1 call up the desired screen as follows: “OS key mp RES] comic 2 select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. ED toe ovsten tron —r | 3 press the {Done} key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-38 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings)Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off Using parameters such as original size and zoom ratio, this function automatically rotates the image to the most suitable position for the set paper size. @ NOTE + The detault setting is "On". 1 call up the desired screen as follows: “oy 2 Select the [On] or [Ott] key, and press the [0K] key. IB to ortsten @ NOTE + Only standard size originals up to LTR (for direct ‘200m ratio) can be rotated. + When Automatic Paper Selection is selected, the paper matching the width willbe dlsplayed as the ‘optimum size if there is no paper withthe optimum length. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. a co Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings) 6-39 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v Needs Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function You can set whether or not to use the Photo mode in the Copy function. When the Photo Mode is, "On", you can select the [Printed Img] and [Photo] keys when making copies with the image quality setting @ NOTE + The dotautt setting is “Off 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: cM — =] > 2 select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. 3 Press the {Done} key. Repeat this until the Be ic Features screen appears again. 6-40 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings)Changing the Current Standard Settings Standard Settings refers to a combination of copy modes that the machine is set to after the power is turned ON or when the é key is pressed. This section describes how to store the currently set copy settings as the Standard Settings. Standard Settings can also be returned to their default settings. @ NOTE + The detautt settings are as follows: = Copy quantity: - Paper selection: Automatic Paper Selection - Exposure/ Image quality: A ~ Copy Ratio: Direct (100%) + Copy function: 1-»1-sided copy @ Storing the Standard Settings for Copying @ NOTE + To change the Standard Settings, Copy settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings beforehand. (See “Flow of Copy Operations,” on p. 2-3.) 1. cattup the desired sereen as follows: “Sr key ep SE co 2 Press the [Store] key. SS [I (stars setter semct Store er rita, Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings) stereo 6-41 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs a3 Press the [Yes] key. The settings currently displayed are stored as the Standard Settings. @ NOTE + The settings displayed here ara the currently set copy settings. Press the [¥] or [a] key to alsplay pFiicrer ieee olate} copy modes that do not ft inthe spay area. 2 | + To cancel storing the current displayed settings as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The [stent ————— Te foo wah To Sie The TT Strsrssategs tat oom isplay returns to the screen in step 2. This screen is displayed for about two seconds. ind 6 BT J00e Auto| omsioon [Frese ort cote ———— 4. ress the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. @ Initializing the Standard Settings 1 Call up the desired screen as follows: “Gy key —, = im emma, | SOE Seta 2 Press the [initialize] key. [BD serans ort) Soc str a tte. i ) 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v 6-42 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Stings)3 check the setting, and press the [Yes] key. ‘The Standard Settings are initialized, @ NOTE + To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2. This screen is displayed for about two seconds. Str Sttbgs otis 4 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Setings) 6-43 Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your ‘Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings Items that have been changed in the Copy Settings can be returned to their default settings. 1 Call up the desired screen as follows: Ot key mp SUH] Ina copy Stas co 2 Press the [Yes] key. Tey Stns Proceed to step 3. @ NOTE + To cancel the initalzation of copy settings, press the [No] key. The display returns o Copy Setting screen, ‘initianze} ] This screen is displayed for about two seconds. 7 Tr Sera) need C= ston enter 3 press the {Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v 644 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Cooy Setings)ew specifications of the Mail Box Function (ail at Settings) Setting/ Storing the Box When using the box, you can set and store each box item beforehand. @ NOTE + A box can store up to 100 items (Box number: 00 to 29). 1 Caltup the desired screen as follows: E> key mm [SRT] camp, SST co 2 Press the desired box number. @ NOTE When entering the box number using the Numeric keys (@-@), press the [OK] key after entering the ‘box number. aE ox sestxer ry 3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + Enter the password stored under Box Set/Store setting. This step is not required when setting the ‘box forthe first time or if a password isnt stored. Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mai BoxSetings) 6-45 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v 4 Press the [Store Name] key. xo i _l) fewer races Cin] ek te a sn aay, o0t | ite 5 enter the box name, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + For details on how to enter the characters, see “Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,” on p. 10-6. + The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name is 24 + To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. 6 Enter the password with the Numeric keys (@-@)- © meortant + Sines there is no way to check the password stored, please record the password you stored and dati keop it separately. nee @ NOTE ® +f no password is stored, proceed to step 7. 9 ® e + Youn delete the number you entered by pressing the & key. + To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. 7 Set the amount of time to elapse before received documents are automatically deleted by pressing the [¥] or [a] key, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + The default setting is “3 days". eee 6-46 Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mai Box Setings)8 Press the (Done] key. Q Press the {Done} key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (MailBoxSetings) 6-47 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v ializing a Box © important + You cannot initialize a box if there is data remaining init 1 Call up the desired screen as follow: cv — 2 Select the box that you want to initialize. @ NOTE + When entering the box number using the Numeric keys (© -©), press the [OK] key after entering the box number. 3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + Enter the password used when the box was stored. (See “Setting/ Storing the Box," on p. 6-45,) Ifa ‘password is not stored, this operation is not required. 4 6-48 Press the [Initialize] key. oxo a.er8 he 1, sweet Crom] Rea lea Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Bor Stings) jes CHILI | a ston vot5 ress the [Yes] key. ——— - The boxis italized. | Teves) @ Note ss Ct nti + To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. 6 Press the [Done] key. 3] [ste vonter 7 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. eT Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Setings) 6-49 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function You can select whether or not to use the Photo Mode in the Mail Box Function. When the Photo Mode is "On", you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when scanning documents with the image quality setting. @ NOTE +The defautt setting is “Of”. 1 Call up the desired screen as follows: “bey eto a 2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] — key. [BD trots os 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6-50 Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Nal Box Setings)Setting the Standard mode for Scanning You can change the standard mode for when scanning originals into a box. You can also return the standard mode settings to their defaults. @ NOTE + The default settings are as follows: - Document Size: Auto ~ Record Size: Auto - Exposure/ Image quality: A @ Storing the Standard Settings for Scanning @ NOTE + To change the Standard Settings, Scan settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings beforehand. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.) 1 caitup the desired screen as follows: “6 key > ST] mm on tee o 2 Press the [Store] key. sonst stro intan. ee Porter ne 3 Press the [Yes] key. ‘The settings currently displayed are stored va ae He TT suc ote cota @ NOTE Th. Soe fap. Sam = \ omnesp EE + The settings displayed here are the currently set lots Auto AUtO cnnismrEl scan settings. Press the [¥] or [a] key to display / | = the scan modes that do not fit in the display area. + To cancel storing the currently displayed settings as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2. Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mal Box Setings) 6-51 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v 4 This screen is displayed for about two seconds. Sou heey. Stare Sttgs setae Tap. Sue Te. See “Auto Aut Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. i Initializing the Standard mode for Scanning 1 Call up the desired screen as follows: stad Sean Sates oy “Gy” key —- 2 Select the [Initialize] key. Serres) Sect treo itis, 3 6-52 Check the settings, and press the [Yes] key. ——== The Standard Settings are initialized. eH OF to witinet ° oe NOTE sot fe. See zi Tocncl te itaaton pes be(Notoy Te [OR Ku Au am display rotuns tothe seen stop 2 . EJ E_] Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Setngs)This screen is displayed for about two seconds. ————————j, Ts Stars sertegs estore 100% Auto _AUtO omy 4 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. oo ——— ee Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (MailBox Setings) 6-53 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsSetting Speci ications of the System Management ID (System Settings) Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password You can set a password for the system manager. If the System Manager ID/ Passwor restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings. @ NOTE + For details on how to enter the characters, see “Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,” fon p. 10-6. + The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name, contact, and comment is 32, and for a E-mail address is 64, + The maximum number of numbers you can store for the System Manager ID and Password is seven. If ‘you store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows: - Example: When ‘321"is entered > "0000321" is stored 1. cali up the desired screen as follows: ST key ep SST] —mp> | @ NOTE + When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 2. Press the [System Manager] key, then enter ‘the name of the system manager. @ NOTE * To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. 3 Press the [System Manager ID] key, and enter — the number within seven digits with the ED Uses vac Srerst Numeric keys ((©)-(@)) as the new System eae Manager ID. ese + You cannot store a System Manager ID with only [ar the number “0”, such as “0000000" 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs + You must set the System Manager 1D. = JC + You gan delete the number you entered by pressing Eaamer J the & key. + To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. 6-54 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings)4. Press the [System Password] key, and enter the number within seven digits with the Numeric keys ((0)-(@)) as the new System Password. Then press the [Next] key. @ NOTE + You cannot store a System Password with only the ‘number *0", such as “0000000". + Press the [Next] key when not setting the System Password, + To erase the entered character (number), press the & key. + To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. ster vote 5 Press the [E-mail Address] key, then enter e- mail address of the system manager. Csyten rer Serge) eC = Ts 6 Press the [Contact information] key, then enter where to contact the system manager. Deter noeper settel kad |= Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Satngs) 6-55 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs7 Press the [Comment] key, then enter a com- — ment for the system manager. ate oer sd Sd eee 8 once you have completed all settings, press a the [0K] key. [ED ston ow settee) iyster vont 9 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your ¥ Needs 6-56 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings)Setting the Department ID Management By storing a Department ID and Password for each department, you can set the machine so that its functions can be used only after the correct password has been entered. This is called “Department ID Management”. Department IDs and Passwords for up to 1000 departments can be stored. This function allows you to check the print totals for each department for management purposes. With Department ID Management, the following operations can be performed: + Setting whether or not to set Department ID Management + Storing the Department ID and the Password @ NOTE +The detautt setting is Of”. +The maximum number of numbers you can store forthe Department ID and Password is seven. Ifyou store them with less than seven digits, he machine stores them as follows: - Example: When “321"is entered —> "0000321" stored @ Storing the Department ID and Password 1 Cattup the desired screen as follows: OS" key emmy SEES amen [FER @ NOTE + When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password after pressing the [System Settings) key. Then, press the © key. 2 Select whether to use the Department ID Man- agement function. ED overt 0 treme) @When you select the [Off] key: Press the [OK] key, then press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Additional Functions screen. @ When you select [On] key: To store the Department ID and Password, press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key and proceed to step 3. 3 Press the [Store] key. Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Stings) 6-57 A 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your vy 4 Press the [Department ID] key and enter the = pepartment ID with the Numeric keys (©)- Stoel Use te rere ts. ). @ NOTE + You cannot store a Department ID with only the ‘number ‘0’, such as "0000000". 5 6 Press the [Password] key and enter the pass- word with the Numeric keys ((0)-()). @ NOTE + You cannot store a Password with only the number “0”, such as 0000000". + When a password is not stored, you can use this ‘machine by entering only the Department ID. Press the [OK] key. 7 6-58 Press the [OK] key. = IES stow tort. o/rosert vo 000 Tepe 0 [Fem vanes —~ eens |=) ee fsa tent Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)8 Press the [OK] key. € NOTE + When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man- agement is enabled. (See "Entering the Depart. ‘ment ID and Password,” on p. 10-4.) 9 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password,” on p. 10-4. @ Changing the Password hearse Noe) Rt, rt © wt and tse iemimante gape comer iste tontr 1 Caltup the desired screen as follows: “Sy > T] om GEL: @ NOTE + When the System Manager 1D/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept. ID/Password] key. [ED enrceet 0 vapor] Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings) 6-59 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs3 Use the [¥] and [4] keys to display the Pass- = word you want to change. Then select the tse tet Pomel nx tn Password, and press the [Edit] key. (Cost 6 reics —T_—] 4. Enter the Password with the Numeric keys ——— (@-@), and press the [OK] key. [EB Bicone) ta tre mxere ys. @ NOTE simoxteot © 2ezzze ‘cannot store a password with only the number ich as "0000000", 5 Press the [0K] key. eter voit 6 Press the [0K] key. es 6 Nor [Bb borter tinea + When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man- ae agement is enabled. (See “Entering the Depart- ‘ment ID and Password,"on p. 10-4.) Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v 6-60 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings)7 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password,” on p. 10-4. Fees tp,ogertort 0 we rsmard re te Zz fee ever ae Fasrre, ese ew 0 fers the sn, ise eb @ Erasing the Department ID and Password 1 Cait up the desired screen as follow: on key a FSS | > Fee. @ NOTE + When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password atter pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key. 3 Use the [¥] and [a] keys to display the Depart- = ment you want to erase. Then select the IED stow ot. tPacrrc nox 00 Department, and press the [Erase] key. Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Satings) 6-61 Needs 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit YourNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v 4. Press the [Yes] key. eos The Department ID and Password are erased. \erese) @ NOTE ve to area? + To cancel erasing, press the [No] key. 5 ress the [Ok] key. [BD tes tot orem re Ta cum conn |=] conse |77 em 6 Press the [0K] key. Ceteot D Meveeert) @ NOTE + Wen you select he [On kay, Deparment 1D Man- = agement is enabled, (See “Entering the Depart- ment ID and Password,“ on p. 10-4.) 7 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this unti the screen on the right appears. . For details on how to enter the Department ID and Jaga eet © a Peers era te Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password: on p. 10-4. = Fame te eri © ae Parr, ers tre D fo aftr tbeg te wens, re he a sar [pst ener 6-62 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings)@ Checking and Printing Counter Information You can display and also print a list of the count of the paper that was used by each department. 1. Caltup the desired screen as follows: “oO key > > FS, @ NOTE * When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password atter pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 2 select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals} re = key. [Bd Doostant 0 noerert] 3 check or print the count of print tot The print total with the Department ID left blank (not displayed) is the total of prints from the driver not correspondent with a stored Department ID (unknown ID). When only checking the counter: Press the [¥] or [4] key to display the desired Department, and check the print totals. ————————————— eee Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings) 6-63 sto SuitYour 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settin NeedsNeeds 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your v @ When printing the displayed list: Press the [Print List] key. The screen shown at right appears. Press the [Yes] key, @ NOTE + if you do not want to print, press the [No] key. The screen on the right appears during printing. @ NOTE + To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key. + To close the screen, press the [Done] key. Trt Tota. eat aii (rt oxy tas) rf Pd — siete 10 © DPrnte.. 4 Press the [0K] key. ree tora) (aioe es) “ere If 6-64 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)5 Press the [OK] key. @ NOTE * When you select the (On) key, Department ID Man- agement is enabled. (See "Entering the Depart- ‘ment ID and Password,” on p. 10-4.) [BD rt b rao) 6 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password," on p. 10-4, @ Erasing Print Totals fe bart © a ser ary Ow Ta Ee JC ff xtra D ou Racor, rece te Se ee Bae, bo [ter wr The following instructions describe how to delete the print totals made so far for all departments. 1. caltup the desired screen as follow: “ey key —) =] ee ae an @ NOTE * When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password atter pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 2 Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals] key. —— [ED rarest 0 vraarot) Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings) 6-65 1g Common Settings to Suit Your 6 Setting and Agjustin« Needs3 Press the [Clear All Totals] key. = ; Trent Tota (ie ras ste wn 4. select the [Yes] key. fa i @ NOTE ‘rtine) ; + Ifyou do not want o erase the counter, press the Cr cy cot No} key. L Eee | The message “Erased.” is displayed in the touch 3 panel display for about two seconds. ia s erased, l 3 2 5 i 8 — 2 5 8 2 5 Press the [Ok] key. = 2 (a 2 a coc 2 “av oa) ame 3 rc 7 | 5 E a 22 ‘sia a £3 er a Bz — a © [pete mtr 6-66 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Stings)6 Press the [0K] key. @ NOTE + When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man- agement is enabled. (See “Entering the Depart- ment ID and Password," on p. 10-4.) steer b tomoenet) 7 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the sereen on the right appears. - For details on how to enter the Department ID and Rg re mowbet Ome Pesmravery re | Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password,’ on p, 10-4 i as fees aes resort ne D Ags why sehen, bes heb L fasten @ Selecting whether or not to Accept Print Jobs of Unknown ID You can set whether or not to print documents from a driver not correspondent with a stored Department ID. @ NOTE + The [Accept jobs with unknown ID] key is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled. + The default setting is “On. 1. caltup the desired screen as follows: co —o ==] 4 gE @ NOTE + When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password atter pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your es Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings) 6-67 Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 2 Select the [On] key. @ Nove + When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man agement is enabled. (See “Entering the Depart- ment ID and Password," on p. 10-4.) i 3 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. @ When you select the [On] key: Accepts print job from an unknown ID. @ When you select the [Off] key: Does not accept print job from an unknown ID. 6-68 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password,"on p. 10-4. eg bertrt O eo Pasa ra PO zz eI1-4 Acta car 0 pars, es 9 Rete eg ie eo, ee the Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings)Setting Device Information ‘You can set the name of this machine and the place where it is located. 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: “Co key ep FT] em @ NOTE + When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password atter pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the © key. 2 Press the [Device Name] and [Location] keys, then enter the name of this machine and the location where this machine is placed. Then press the [OK] key. @ NOTE + For details on how to enter the characters, see "Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display.” on p. 10-6 + The maximum number of character which can be entered is 32. + To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Erasing a Message Board [EB Dsnce vrrastin seer) ramet Sie ‘A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the system manager using the utlty software. You can erase a message displayed in the message board. @ NOTE + The message board is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled, 1 all up the desired screen as follows: “Or key > ee] > EH @ NOTE * When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password atter pressing the [System Settings) key. Then, press the © key. Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setings) 6-69 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 2 Select the [Yes] or [No] key. When you select the [Yes] key: The message is not displayed. @When you select the [No] key: ‘The message remains displayed. ere Toe wes Bra] i. 30 cu contents Or he nessn Sane? 3 6-70 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Setngs)“Printing the Report Printing the Contents of the Network Settings € NOTE + For details of the contents of the User's Data List, see the Network Guide. + You can print the contents only when the network printer function is enabled. 1 cattup the desired screen as follows: 67 key mm FS] cep SE Co 2 Press the [Yes] key. —i @ NOTE Ciera + When you do not want to print press the [No] key. feet wats ue Ede | The screen on the right appears during the report printing, @ NOTE © Drea. + To cancel the report print, press the [Cancel] key. + To close the screen, press the [Done] key. 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your es Printing the Report 6-71 NeedsLoading Paper and Adding Toner This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner. Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers... Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Ditferent Paper Size Adding Toner : Consumables and Options.............e ee eeeee ae wee TAD Consumables. . wee TAZ Options 743 TA 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner Loading Paper This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers. © iwrortant + When setting STMTsize paper, place it horizontally (SMTA) @ NOTE + The following size paper can be loaded in the paper drawers: + Paper drawer 1, 2 :LTR = Paper drawer 3, 4: 11°17 LGL/ LTR/ LTRA/STMTR + For details of available paper stock which can be loaded in the paper drawers, see ‘Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-17. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers When the selected paper has run out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the display prompting you to load paper appears. Accaution "When loading pape, tke care not to cut your hands onthe edes of the pape. © meortant +The message wil also appear i the selected paper drawer is not fully inserted into the machine. Prop- erly insert the paper drawer. @ NOTE + You can check the amount of paper remaining in the paper drawer by looking at the remaining paper quantity display on the front of the paper drawer. «Ifthe above message appears during printing, the remaining prints will automaticaly be made after ‘you load paper. When you select other feeding Position, the remaining prints will be made after you press the [OK] key. + To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key. KT 7-2 Loading Paper1 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer in which you want to load paper. 2 Grip the handle and pull out the paper drawer until it stops. Loading Paper and Adding Toner 73 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner y 3 open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack. © mrortant + Rewrap any remaining paper i its original pack- age, and store it in a dry place away from direct ‘sunlight. + Do not copy on the following types of paper stock. Doing so may cause a paper jam. ~ Severely curled or wrinkled paper. ~ Transparencies. ~ Paper on which color images have been copied. ~ Paper which has been copied on using a digital full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side either. - Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side either. @ NOTE + Paper drawers 1 and 2 hold up to about 1,500 sheets of paper each (20-Ib bond (80 g/m). + Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold up to about 550 sheets of paper each (20-16 bond (80 g/m). + For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon. 4 tum the paper stack over, and place it in the paper drawer. Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the Paper stack against the right wall of the paper drawer. © iweortant + If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it inthe paper drawer. + Make sure that the height ofthe paper stack does ‘not exceed the limit mark at the back ofthe paper drawer. + Make sure that the paper size setting in the paper drawer matches the size of paper to be loaded. @ NOTE + When loading paper in the paper drawer 3 for the first time, set the size plato of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. + For details of print direction of papers already printed with logos or patterns, see "Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation,” on BITS. 7-4 Loading Paper5 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks. Accaution + When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury. © iwrortant + Never place paper or any other items in the open part of the paper drawer next to the paper stack, Doing so may cause paper jams, @ NOTE + When paper runs out during printing, load paper, and follow the instructions in the touch panel dis- play. The machine automatically restarts the remaining print Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-5 A 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner y Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size I you want to load a new paper size in a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below to adjust the paper drawer guides. You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper size: 11°x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ UTRR/ STMTR, © iwrortant + The paper size loaded in the paper drawer 3 can be changed. + The paper sizes loaded in the paper drawer 4 can be changed by your service representative. For more details, contact your service representative. + When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTA). 1 squeeze the lever on the length guide as shown in the figure and slide the length guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size. When loading 11"x17"-size paper, slide the length guide all the way to the left, and drop it downward 7-6 Loading Paper2 squeeze the lever on the width guide as shown in the illustration. Without releasing the lever, slide the width guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size. © important + Ifthe length and width guides are not adjusted properly forthe paper size loaded in the paper rawr, then the correct paper sizes might not appear inthe display. Not adjusting the guides cor- rectly might cause paper jams, dirty prints or make the inside of the machine dirty. To prevent these ‘problems from occurring, make certain that the Width guide guides are adjusted correctly for the loaded paper size. 3 change the paper drawer’s size plate so that it matches the new paper size that you loaded. aS Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-7 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner When there is only a small amount of toner remain- ing, the message to the right appears in the display. Prints can still be made, but at this time you should purchase new toner so that you have it on hand when itis needed. A WARNING + Never dispose of the waste toner in a fire or incinerator. Doing so may result in an explo- n. @ NOTE + When this message appears, approximately 300 prints can stil be made (LTR: size Canon Standard Chart). However, since this number may vary depending upon the original, itis recommended that the toner be added as soon as possible. When the toner has run out and prints can no longer be made, the message describing how to add toner appears in the display. Add toner following the described procedure. © iwrortant + The screen prompting you to add toner is displayed until you press the [Recover Later/Done] key. + Use oniy the toner botle recommended for use on this machine + Never add more than one bottle of toner + Add toner afer the “Add toner" message is dis- played. @ NOTE + You can check how to add toner by pressing the [Previous] or [Next] key on the screen. +f the toner runs out during a print jab, the remain- ing prints will be made after you add toner. 7-8 Adding Toner 1oox_stiro ee a * a Pr [ian oe ae ay we1 open the toner supply cover. 2 Hold the toner bottle with both hands and turn itup and down a few times as shown in the illustration, to evenly distribute the toner inside the bottle. 3 Align the protrusions of the toner bottle with the slots on the toner supply port. Gently Press the toner bottle down onto the toner supply port until you hear a click. ‘The toner bottle is now locked onto the toner supply port. 4 Press down lightly on the toner bottle with one hand, and pull out the black shutter of the toner supply port as far as it will go. Loading Paper and Adding Toner 79 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner 5 Grip the shutter of the toner bottle, and pull it out slowly until it stops. Toner flows into the toner box. 6 Lightly tap the top of the toner bottle to make sure that all of the toner empties into the toner box. 7 Push back the shutter of the toner bottle. 8 Make sure you hear a click when the black shutter of the toner supply port has been pushed back in as far as the | position. When the toner bottle starts to come loose from the toner supply port, lightly hold it so that it does not fall over. A caution + Never try to remove the toner bottle before you hear the click, doing so can damage the toner ‘supply port, 7-10 Adding Toner9 Remove the empty toner bottle from the toner supply port. A warning = Do not throw used toner bottles into open flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining inside the bottle and result in burns or a fire. A caution + When removing used toner bottles from the toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully to prevent toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician. 10 close the toner supply cover. @ NOTE + Press the [Recover Later/Done] key to clase the ‘screen prompting you to add toner. 11 Fottow the instructions in the touch panel display. Loading Paper and Adding Toner TAN 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner Pree a BS: Consumables and Options ‘The following consumables and accessories are avai vice representative. Consumables m™ Paper stock In addition to plain paper (14"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ STMT), transparencies, labels and other types of paper stock are available. For details, consult your service representative. Avcaution + Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire. © important + For high-quality print oulput, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon. + To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining paper tightly wrapped in its original package. @ Black toner When the “Add toner” message appears in the touch panel display, add toner which has been approved for use with this machine. Only black toner can be used with this machine, Ac warnine ‘Never dispose of waste toner in a fire or incin- erator. Doing so may result in an explosion. A caution * Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a fire. © important + Store toner bottles in a cool location away from direct sunight. (The recommended storage condi- tions: temperature below 86°F, and humidity below 80%) 7-12 — Consumables and Options ble from Canon. For details, consult your ser-@ Genuine supplies Canon has developed and manufactured parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner specifically for use in this, machine. As such, for superior print quality, we recommend that you use Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner in this machine. ‘Ask your authorized Canon dealer or service provider for Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner. We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your service representative before they run out. Options Cassette ‘The paper drawer can be adjusted to hold the Paper size you want to load. For instructions on how to adjust paper drawers for paper sizes, see “Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size," on p. 7-6. ‘You can adjust the paper drawer for the following paper sizes: 11°x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRA/ STMTR. Loading Paper and Adding Toner 713 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner> Troubleshooting This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality. Removing Paper Jams Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam. Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1...... Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2 aooe Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4...... Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass an Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder 0.02... ceeeeee eee Routine Cleaning Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass - Cleaning the Feeder... 0... ..eeeeeeeceeeeeee eee Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning)... 8-30 Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning)..............- 0. eat Selt-diagnostic (Error) Display.......... besten 832 If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning. .........eceecseeceeeeee 835 When the Power does not Turn ON eee 8.36 Service Call Message «2.2.26... beste ves 887 84 8 TroubleshootingWw 8 Troubleshooting Removing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs, the following display appears in the touch panel display. Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam The display indicating the location of the paper jam appears in the touch panel display, followed by instructions on how to clear the paper jam. This display will repeatedly appear in the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. © Example of display indicating the location of the SESE arLtaaeart paper jam. ton Rene mes Pe. © important | + When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue the operation. Follow the directions in the [BB on tas ees, [Sten tor display to remove the jammed paper. © Example of display indicating how to clear the aT paper jam. Ea mWhen you select the [Recover Later] key: You can continue operations such as mode set- tings or scannings even when jammed paper is not removed. A caution + When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. + When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician. 82 Removing Paper Jams1 inspect all areas which appear in the touch panel display, and remove any jammed paper. See the appropriate pages for instructions on how to find and remove jammed paper. ‘© Display indicating locations of the paper jam and page number describing how to remove jammed paper. Feeder (See p. 8-22.) Exit slot Remove the protruding jammed paper. Paper drawer 1 (See p. 8-12) Stack bypass (See p. 8-20.) 1 __ Right cover (See p. 8-10.) Main unit (See p.8-5) Paper drawer 3 or 4 (See p. 8-18.) Paper drawer 2 (See p. 8-15.) IMPORTANT + Ifa jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from inside the machine. 2 tra paper jam occurs within the optional units, see the description on the pages for each option. @Finisher-F1, Saddle Finisher-F2, @ Paper Deck-G1 ; Puncher Unit-B1 (See p. 9-13, p. 9-29.) (See p.9-4,) jl 8 " 8 a ol 3 Hl 3 = a5 & = = eo © Copy Tray-C3 (See p. 9-35.) Removing Paper Jams 8-3WwW 8 Troubleshooting 3 after you have removed all paper jams at the locations indicated in the touch panel dis- Play, restore all levers and covers to their original positions. 4 continue operations following the instructions displayed in the touch panel display. @ If there is remaining paper to be removed: ‘The display indicating how to clear the paper jam appears in the touch panel display. Repeat the procedure from step 1 € NOTE + Once you have cleared the paper jam in locations other than the Feeder, print operation restarts. 8-4 Removing Paper JamsRemoving Paper Jams in the Main Unit Ia paper jam occurs in the main unit, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. Tae 5 a he ra Toi. Row ib ed Poe, a Be sow tas fe [aster nowt 1 open the tront cover of the main unit. 2 Move the green lever in the direction of the arrow. 3 Grip the lever and pull out the fixing unit. The fixing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out together. Removing Paper Jams. 85 A 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting 4 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the fixing unit. 5. open the left cover. 6 tum the green knob in the direction of the arrow, and remove any jammed paper. A caution ‘The parts located around the cover are subject to high temperatures. When removing jammed ‘paper, take care not to touch anything in this area except this cover. 7 Turn the duplexing unit knob in the direction of the arrow displayed on the screen, and remove any jammed paper. 86 Removing Paper Jams8 close the cover. A caution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. 9 Gently push the fixing unit back into its origi- nal position. A caution + When returning the fixing unit to its original Position, be careful not to get your fingers ‘caught, as this may result in personal injury. 10 Return the green lever to its original position. 11 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the duplexing unit. Removing Paper Jams 87 A 8 TroubleshootingWwW 8 Troubleshooting 12 Remove any jammed paper while opening the left cover as shown in the Illustration. 13 Remove any jammed paper while opening the Fight cover as shown in the illustration. 14 open the duplexing transport unit, and remove any jammed papers. 15 cently push the duplexing unit back to its orig- inal position. A CAUTION + When returning the duplexing unit to its origi- ‘nal position, be careful not to get your fingers ‘caught, as this may result in personal injury. 8:8 Removing Paper Jams16 Remove all jammed papers, and close the front cover. A caution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- 17 Folio the instructions in the touch panel display. (See “Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 8-2.) eee eceeereeeeneen Removing Paper Jams 89 8 TroubleshootingVv 8 Troubleshooting Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover if paper jam occurs in the right cover, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. @ NOTE + When the Paper Deck-Gt (option) is attached, ‘move the paper deck away from the main unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,"on p. 9-3.) ar ‘Btn, Bre ne Sand se, 1. open the right cover (upper) of the main unit. 2 Remove any jammed paper. 3° Close the right cover (upper). Accaution “When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. 810 Removing Paper Jams4 open the right cover (lower) of the main unit. 5 Remove any jammed paper. 6 close the right cover (lower). A caution When closing the cover, be caretul not to get your fingers caught a this may result in per- Sonal ir. 7 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 8-2.) Removing Paper Jams en A 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1 It paper jam ocours in paper drawer 1, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. @ NOTE + When the Paper Deck-G1 (option) is attached, ‘move the paper deck away from the main unit. (See "Paper Deck-G1,"on p. 93.) 1 open the right cover (upper) of the main unit. 2 Remove any jammed paper. 3° Close the right cover (upper) of the main unit. Accaution = When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. 8-12 Removing Paper Jams.4 press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated on the touch pane! display until the paper drawer comes out. 5 Pull out the paper drawer 1. 6 Remove any jammed paper. 7 Return the paper drawer to its original post- tion. A caution - When returning the paper drawer to its original Position, be careful nat to catch your fingers between the edge of the paper drawer and the aaa Removing Paper Jams 8413 8 Troubleshooting A8 Troubleshooting 8 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,” on p. 8-2.) 814 Removing Paper JamsRemoving Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2 I a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 2, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch Panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that, appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. 1. open the front cover of the main unit. 2 Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow so as to feed the jammed paper to the duplexing unit. 3 > ently pull out the duplexing unit. Removing Paper Jams B15 A 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting 4 open the duplexing transport unit, and remove any jammed paper. 5 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its orig- inal position. A caution ‘When returning the duplexing unit to its origl- ral position, be careful not to get your fingers, ‘caught, as this may result in personal injury. 6 Close the front cover of the main unit. Acaution When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. 7 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out. 816 Removing Paper Jams8 Putt out the paper drawer 2. Q Remove any jammed paper. 10 Return the paper drawer to its original post- tion. A caution ‘When returning the paper drawer to its original Position, be careful not to catch your fingers between the edge of the paper drawer and the ‘main unit. 11 Fotiow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 8-2.) ———— Removing Paper Jams 8417 A 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting 7 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 3 or 4, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the ‘touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. 1 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated in the touch panel display unti the paper drawer comes out. 2 Pull out the paper drawer. ator oe De ed BS 3 Remove any jammed paper. 818 — Removing Paper Jams4 Return the paper drawer to its original posi- tion. A caution * When returning the paper drawer to the original postion, be careful not fo catch your fingers Between the top ofthe paper drawer andthe rain unt. 5 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See “Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,” on p. 8-2.) Removing Paper Jams 8-19 8 TroubleshootingWw 8 Troubleshooting Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass I a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, a display ES ‘similar to the one on the right appears in the touch ‘eatin. Penne the Jet pope panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. @ NOTE + When the Paper Deck-Gt (option) is attached, move the paper deck away rom the main unit. (See —— Farts oe “Paper Deck-G1,"on p. 9:3.) 1 open the right cover (upper) of the main unit. 2. Remove all paper from the stack bypass. 3 Remove any jammed paper. 8-20 Removing Paper Jams4. close the right cover (upper). Accaution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. 5 Foltow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See “Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,” on p. 8-2.) Removing Paper Jams 8-21 A Troubleshooting 88 Troubleshooting Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder fa paper jam occurs in the feeder, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed Paper. 1 Open the upper cover of the feeder. mmed original. 3 > open the middle cover holding the knob in the back. 8-22 Removing Paper Jams4 Remove the jammed original. 5 close the middle cover. Avcaution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. 6 turn the knob in the direction of the arrow, then remove the jammed original. 7 once you have removed the entire jammed original, close the upper cover of the feeder. Accaution * When closing the cover, be careful not to get gers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. Removing Paper Jams 8-23 8 TroubleshootingWw 8 Troubleshooting 8 open the feeder, and remove any jammed Paper. 9 Close the feeder. 10 Fotiow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 6-2.) 8-24 — Removing Paper JamsRoutine Cleaning If the original is not scanned clearly, clean the following parts. For high-quality outputs, we recom- mend cleaning them once or twice a month. + Platen glass + Rear side of platen glass + Feeder Scanning area + White plate, Rolier Awarnine + When cleaning the machine, first tum OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Fai tre to observe these items may result in a fire or electrical shock. + Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so might result in plastic parts becoming deformed. A caution * Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of the plug’s metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result ina tire. + Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine. Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass Clean the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass following the procedure below. © iweortant + ifthe platen glass or the rear side of platen glass is dirty, the original may not be scanned cleanly, or the size ofthe original may be detected incorrectly. 4 @ Cleaning the Platen Glass Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth, 8 Troubleshooting 8-258 Troubleshooting @ Cleaning the Rear Side of Platen Glass Clean the rear side of platen glass with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. Cleaning the Feeder Clean the feeder scanning area, white plate, and roller following the procedure below. © weortant + Ifthe feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or dirty print output. + Spin the roller while cleaning it 1 open the feeder cover. 2 Clean the roller (total of 8 places) at the rear side of the feeder cover with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. 8-26 Routine Cleaning3 > clean the roller (total of 3 places) as shown in the illustration with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. 4 open the middle cover holding the knob in the back. 5 clean the roller (total of 5 places) with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth, 6 ctean the roller (total of 4 places) with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. Routine Cleaning 827 8 Troubleshooting7 Close the middle cover. A caution * When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. 8 close the feeder cover. Axcaution “When closing the cover, be careful not o get your fingers caught, as this may result in per ‘sonal Injury. Q open the feeder. 8 Troubleshooting 10 clean the feeder scanning area with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. 8-28 Routine Cleaning11 clean the white plate with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. © wrortant + Do not push the white plate hard since the white Plate is soft. 12 ciose the feeder. — Routine Cleaning 8-29 A 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding them in the feeder caused by the pencil power ete. on the roller, perform the Feeder Cleaning Cleaning is done by repeatedly feeding blank papers though the feeder. E@ NOTE + The Adjustment/Gleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [¥] and [] keys to scroll tothe desired screen and make the required settings. When the [¥] or [a] key should be pressed, the incication limp is cisplayed inthis manual + It takes about 10 seconds to clean the feeder. 1 Cait up the desired screen as follows: “oe key comm GT] cade Socom Cy 2. Place 10 blank LTR-size paper in the feeder, ————S— then press the [Start] key. rr @ Nore Pes QT,” om + To cancel Feeder Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key. ‘When the feeder is being cleaned, the message on the right appears in the touch panel display. esse Onaral Cera te Fete 8 EB ovr tea. Bote eae 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. 8-30 Routine CleaningOutput Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) If dirt appears on printed paper, clean the wire of the corona assemblies as the need arises. @ NOTE + It takes about 20 seconds to clean the wire. 1. caitup the desired screen as follows: “Okey > -vcomiEial *2Cerg 2 Press the [Start] key. = = @ NOTE ce er we cea + To cancel Wire Cleaning, press the [Cancel key [bate to While wire cleaning is being performed, the = = message to the right appears in the touch panel Tee Ges! display. eancg 3 Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. LL Routine Cleaning 8-31 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting Self-diagnostic (Error) Display Selt-diagnostic (error) messages appear in the touch panel display at the following times: + When printing cannot be performed because of an operational error. + When you need to make a judgment or take some action during scanning or printing. Ifa self-diagnostic message appears, follow the instructions in the touch panel display. Reme Add pape! The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made. ‘The paper drawer is not correctly inserted. Load paper. (See "Loading Paper,” on p. 7-2,) Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go. (See "Loading Paper," on p. 7-2.) Load LTR-size paper. ‘The paper drawer loaded with the best paper size selected by the Automatic Paper selection is not inserted into the machine. Load the indicated paper size in a paper drawer. It you press the “® key while this message is displayed, print will be made with the currently selected paper size. If the message remains even when the indicated paper is loaded, set the Drawer Eligibility of that paper drawer to "On". (See "Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 6-10.) Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key. ‘Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the Feeder. ‘Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals back in the Feeder original supply tray, then press the “@ key. 832 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display4 Remove the paper from the output tray. Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray. Remove the prints from the output tray, then press the“® key. A\Attach the finisher to the main unit. The Finisher is not properly connected to the main unit Connect the Finisher to the main unit properly 84> Paper is jammed in the indicated location. Remove the jammed paper. ‘An original jam or paper jam has occurred, preventing you from making prints. Remove paper from the machine following the ‘guidance messages in the touch panel display. (See “Removing Paper Jams," on p. 8-2.) | Add toner. There is not enough toner to print. ‘Add toner using the toner bottle recommended for Use on this machine. (See "Adding Toner,” on p. 7-8.) 8-33 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting y ‘There is no original on the platen glass. The programed function (mode) requires the original to be placed in the feeder. 4 Place the original on the platen glass. Piace the originals on the platen glass. A Remove the original from the platen glass, ‘The original remains on the platen glass. Remove the original from the platen glass, then place the original again. A Remove the original from the feeder. Original is placed both in the feeder and on the platen glass with the mode which the original ‘cannot be placed in the feeder set. Remove the original from the feeder. 8:34 —Self-diagnostic (Error) Displayemory Becomes Full During Scanning If memory becomes full during scanning of originals, the following messages appear on the touch- panel display. @ NOTE + The machine's memory can hold about 3,700 originals (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart, Standard set- ting) scanned in standard mode. It the message asking whether to print the | pages scanned into memory appears, " select the [Yes] or [No] key as appropriate. pee @When you select the [Yes] key: (ef pie te seared Pages in memory are printed, and remaining originals are then scanned. ‘When you select the [No] key: Pages in memory are not printed. ‘When processing is completed, the display returns to the Basic Features screen. If the screen displayed on the right appears, press the [Cancel] key to return to the Basic a Features screen. A 2. Seeing sted tease tw (rss “oe hay to rd fhe caret io) Troubleshooting If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning 8-35Ww 8 Troubleshooting When the Power does not Turn ON If this machine does not operate even though the main power switch and the control panel switch are both ON, always check that the breaker is not Off. lf the breaker has gone OFF, do not turn it ON. Instead, contact your service representative. Aiwarnina + Do not switch the breaker back ON. Doing so can cause an electrical shock, fire, or smoke, or trip a circuit breaker for the room. __ ON ('Side) it. (O Side) = @ 8-36 When the Power does not Turn ONService Call Message if a malfunction occurs and the machine will not operate normally, the message on the right (the ser- vice call message) will appear in the touch panel dis- play. Tu te xan pn tn (on ARRAS Cie Sn, Form cvs yeut aves ep + ewoo-t00 If this message appears, follow the procedure described below. A warnine = Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock. Accaution * Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may ‘expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. f the cord is damaged, this ‘could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock. © imeortant + Ifyou tun the main power switch OFF when there is a reserved print job, that job will be erased. 1 Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least 40 seconds before turning the main power switch back ON. Service Call Message 8.37 8 Troubleshooting8 Troubleshooting " 2 ithe machine stil does not operate normally, carry out the following procedure, then con- tact your service representative Turn the main power switch OFF. Unplug the power cable from the outlet. 8-38 Service Call Message> Handling Options chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an optional unit, ‘System Configuration. Paper Deck-G1. Parts and Their Functions Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck. . Loading Paper in the Paper Deck ..............05 her-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 Parts and Their Functions ceeeeeee Collate Mode sees Group Mode........ Offset Mode... ee cece cece eee Staple Mode beeeteeeeeee Saddle Stitching Mode. .... Punch Mode . wee Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher ceteeeeeeee Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit... <5... Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge... . Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit Removing Punch Waste ...... Consumables. Copy Tray-C3 . Parts and Their Functions... 2... Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3 ot 9 Handling OptionsWwW 9 Handling Options System Configuration The following options can be attached to the machine. @ NOTE + Before using the touch panel, pee! off the protective film trom the alsplay. Saddle Finisher-F2 92 Finisher-F1 ‘System Configuration Main Unit Control Card Paper Deck-G1 oa m0 m0 0 oO Copy Tray-C3 Puncher Unit-B1Paper Deck-G1 Ifyou attach the Paper Deck-Gt to the machine, one extra size of paper can be used in addition to the paper sizes in the paper drawers of the main unit Up to 3,500 sheets (20-Ib bond (80 g/m?)) of paper can be loaded in the paper deck. © imeortant + When the machine isin the Low-Power made (the touch panel not displayed, and ony the “key and the Main Power indicator are li), you may not be able fo open the paper deck. In this case, press the key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open burton. & NOTE + Paper size of the Paper Deck is fixed to LTR. Parts and Their Functions Release Lever Press to remove the Paper Dack from the Main Unit, Open button Press to load paper orto check for @ paper jam. Paper Supply indicator Enabies you to check the amount of paper remaining in the Papor Deck. Paper Deck Max, 2,500 sheots (20-5 bond (80 g/m)) can be stacked —_—.s Paper Deck-Gt 9-3 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck ta paper jam occurs in the Paper Deck-G1, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. Poa Tae Accaution “When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. + When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. if they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. if toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician. 1 Press the release lever to remove the Paper Deck from the main unit. 2. Remove any jammed paper. 9-4 Paper Deck-G13 Press the Open button to open the Paper Deck. © imeortant + When the machine is in the Low-Power mode {the touch panels not displayed, and only the “@ key and the Main Power indicator are it), you may ‘not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the "5 key beforehand fo reactivate the ‘machine, then press the Open button. 4 Remove any jammed paper. 5 Close the Paper Deck and reconnect it to the main unit Accaution + When reconnecting the Paper Deck to the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury. 6 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 8-2.) —_____—————————— eee Paper Deck-G1 o5 A 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options Loading Paper in the Paper Deck 1 Press the Open button to open the Paper Deck. © wrortant + When the machine isin the Low-Power mode (the touch pane! isnot displayed, and only the “>” key and the Main Power indicator are i), you may ‘not be able to open the paper deck. in this case, press the “Tey key beforehand to reactivate the ‘machine, then press the Open button. 2 26 Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack (Make sure that the seam on the center of the package is face up). Accaution ° + When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. © iweortant + Rewrap any remaining paper inits original pack- ‘age, and store itn a dry place away from direct sunlight. + Do not copy on the folowing types of paper stock. Doing s0 may cause a paper jam. - Severely curled or wrinkled paper. Transparencies. - Paper which has been copied on using a digital full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side either). - Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side either) @ NOTE + The Paper Deck holds up to about 3,500 sheets of paper (20-Ib bond (80 g/m*)) + For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon. Paper Deck-Gi3 Place it in the paper deck. ©) iweortant + Ifthe paper is curled, curl it down before placing it in the paper drawer. + Make sure that the height ofthe paper stack does not exceed the limit mark atthe back ofthe paper drawer. 4. close the Paper Deck. A caution + When returning the Paper Deck to its original Position, be careful not to get your fingers ‘caught, as this may result in personal injury. @ NOTE + For details of print direction of paper already printed with logos or pattorns, see “Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation,” on p19, 97 Paper Deck-G1 9 Handling Options9 Handing Options Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 Parts and Their Functions Upper cover Open to removed jamed paper. (See "Removing Paper Jams inthe Finisher,” on p. 9-13.) ‘Top cover of the puncher unit ‘Open this cover when a paper jam ‘occurs inthe puncher unit. (See “Removing Paper Jams In the Puncher Unit” on p. 9-29.) AL Front cover of the puncher unit ‘Open this cover when a paper jam ‘occurs in the puncher unit, orwhen removing the punch waste. (See “Removing Paper Jams inthe Puncher Unit on p. 9:28, "Remov- ing Punch Waste,"on p. 9-32,) Output Tray Papers are output to tase trays. You can assign the trays 60 that the output of a specie function is ‘output to a desig- nated tray, Front cover (upper) Open this cover to replace the staple casein the staple unit, oF ‘when a staple jam occurs. (See "Replacing the Staple Casein the ‘Stapler Unit” on p. 9-15, “Romov- Ing Jammed Staples from the ‘Stapler Unit"on p. 9-18.) Front cover lower) ‘Open this cover when a paper jam of staple jam occur in the saddle sttcher uni, or when replacing the saddle sttcher unit staple cartridge. (See "Removing Paper Jamin the Sedde Sticher Bookiet tray Unit"on p. 9-2, "Replacing the The paper that I folded and stapled at Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Car the center to form a booketis delvered Mige,"onp. 9-24, and "Removing to this tray slammed Staples from the Saddle * Only avalable in the Saddle Finisher- Stfeher Unis,“an p. 9:26.) 2, * Only avaliable in the Sadcle Fin isher 2. “This illustration shows the Saddle Finisher-F2 with the Puncher Unit-B1 attached to it, * In the description on the following pages Finisher-F1 and Saddle Finisher-F2 are referred to collectively as “Finisher” unless otherwise stated. 9-8 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Collate Mode This function automatically collates print sets into page order before they are delivered. Group Mode This function outputs all prints of the same page in one set and slightly shifts the output position of print sets to make them easier to handle. @ NOTE + When the Collate or Group mode is set, the tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the paper is automatically delivered to another ‘acceptable tray. When the paper reaches the stacking limit ofall of the acceptable trays, printing stops temporarily. After you remove the delivered paper from the tray, the tray moves up the corresponding dis tance and printing ofthe remaining sets restarts. Offset Mode This function outputs papers shifted to the front. © irortant + You cannot set the Offset mode when printing on STMTA-size paper. @ NOTE + These functions shift each set of output paper about 1-1/4" (30 mm) before delivery, when the Collate function or Group function has been set, and copies are made or prints output from a computer. Staple Mode This function automatically collates print sets into page order, staples the sets, and outputs them. Accaution * Do not put your hand in the tray's stapling area when the machine is equipped with the Finisher. Doing so may result in injury. © important + The tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the printing stops temporanly. Remove all the paper on the tray, and the remaining printing and stapling will start. @ NOTE + Ifthe number of sheets in one set exceeds 30 (for 11°x17'/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 (for LTR size), stapling will not be performed. Only the Collating willbe performed. + Ifthe machine stops during stapling and a message is displayed, it means that almost all ofthe staples have been used up and the staple cartridge must be replaced. Replace the staple cartridge in this case. (See "Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit"on p. 9-15.) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-9 9 Handling OptionsCopies are stapled at the following places. @ When an original is placed on the platen glass: © Corner staple area © Doubie staple area | t Upper left — Fp bee ==> Lowee right } el ightede Lower ett | ot ol jae Let sie 9 Handling Options ‘@ When originals are placed in the Feeder: © Corner staple area © Doubie staple area H Tme_| ——,| FH FO borer rant HA teint QL nen era SSS eon Lense SOE torso ao ieron tSeerit tomes Fight side Lett ede nS ol hae © weortant + You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing papers, and labels. + You cannot corner-staple STMTR-size paper. + You cannot double-staple LGL/ LTAR/ STMTR-size paper. 9-10 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Saddle Stitching Mode This function enables you to make booklets consisting of pages folded and stapled at the center. Originals Copy Saddle stitch The pages are folded with a roller to form a booklet. L \ \ ©) imortant + This function is only available with the Saddle Finisher-F2. + The maximum number of sheets that can be bound is 15 (60 pages). + The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are 11°x17" and LTAR. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-11 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options Punch Mode This function punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets. @ The hole punched area is as shown in the illustration. © Platen glass @ Feeder Hole punched area Hote punches Ti Hele punched wea Hote punched © wrortant + The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size, = 2 holes: LGL/LTRR = 3 holes: 11°x177/ LTR + Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers labels and 3-hole punch. + You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper. @ NOTE + This function is only available when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1. @ The distance between the punch holes is as shown in the illustration. a 4 81/2" (216 mm) (216 mm) holes holes 9-12 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher | a paper jam occurs using the Finisher, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that ‘appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. A caution + When removing jammed original or paper iginals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the + When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, burns or electrical shock. this may result in + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. f they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with ‘warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the Jammed paper ‘gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. f toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician. 1 Remove any paper protruding from the output tray, © meortant + When making prints withthe Staple mode, do not remove the output sheets not yet stapled. (Stapling willbe performed atter removing the jammed paper.) 2 open the top cover and check the inside of the Finisher. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-13, 9 Handling OptionsWw 9 Handling Options 3 Litt cover 1 upward, and remove any jammed Paper. Then, return cover 1 to its original posi- tion, A caution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. 4 Litt cover 2 upward, and remove any jammed paper. @ NOTE + When you pull up cover 2, cover 1 is pulled up together with it 5 Return cover 2, and close the top cover. Accavtion * When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. 6 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See "Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,”on p. 8-2.) 914 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple Ns ‘case must be replaced. The message on the right will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple case. 1 Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher 2 Push down the green lever. The staple cartridge will slightly come out. 3 Pull out the protruding staple cartridge hold- ing it by its left and right sides. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-15, 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options 7 4 Pull out the empty staple case holding it by its left and right sides. @ NOTE + Place the staple cartridge as shown in the ilustra- tion, then pull out the staple case. 5 in @ NOTE + Only one staple case can be inserted at a time. + Use only the special staple case for use on this machine. rt the new staple case. ing the staples by pulling it 6 Remove the seal straight out. 7 Gently push the staple cartridge back into the ‘inisher until the green lever returns to its original position. 9-16 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B18 Make sure that the staple cartridge is firmly ‘secured, then close the front cover (upper) of the Finisher. A caution When closing the cover, be careful nt to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. @ NOTE * When you close the cover, the staple unit automati- cally performs a “dry” stapling operation several times to reposition the staples. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 O17 A 9 Handling OptionsWw 9 Handling Options Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit If a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right i a appears. Follow the procedure described below to | Steas OnT ee oe eee remove any jammed staples. 1 Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher. 2. Push down the green lever. The staple cartridge will slightly come out. 3 Pull out the protruding staple cartridge hold- ing it by its left and right sides. 948 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B14. Lower the knob of the staple cartridge. 5 Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case. 6 Return the knob of the staple cartridge to its original position. 7 Gently push the staple cartridge back into the Finisher until the green lever returns to its original position. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 919 A 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options 8 Make sure that the staple cartridge is firmly secured, then close the front cover (upper) of the Finisher Avcaution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. @ NOTE 9-20 + When you close the cover, the staple unit automati- cally performs a “dry” stapling operation several times to reposition the staples. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit lta paper jam occurs when the booklet mode was set using Saddle Finisher-F2, the screen shown at right, appears. Remove the jammed paper according 10 the instructions on the screen. @ NOTE + This procedure is only required when Saddle Fin: isher-F2 is attached. A caution fas pw When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. + When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the mac! ‘bums or electrical shock. this may result in + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will ditty your hands or clothing. f they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with ‘warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician. 1 Move the Saddle Finisher-F2 away from the main unit, holding the section indicated in the figure on the right. 2 Remove the paper in the stack. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher U 921 9 Handling OptionsVv 9. Handing Options 3 connect the Saddle Finisher-F2 to the main unit. Acaution ‘When returning the Finisher to its original posi- jon, be careful not to catch your fingers between the edge of the Finisher and the main 4 open the front cover (lower) of the Finisher. 5 turn the knob on the right. 6 turn the knob on ihe lett while pressing it. 9-22 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B17 Remove any jammed paper. 8 close the front cover (lower) of the Finisher. A caution + When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. Q Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 8-2.) a Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-23 A 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options ' Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple hae ae cartridge must be replaced. The screen on the right will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge. @ NOTE + This procedure is only required when the Sadale Fin- isher-F2 is attached. Seer oo 1 open the front cover (lower) of the Finisher. 2 Pullout the saddle stitcher unit. 3 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then push it up. 9-24 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B14. Pull out the empty staple cartridge holding it by its left and right sides. 5 insert the new staple cartridge. © important + Replace both the inner and outer staple cartridges at the same time. 6 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then return it to its original posi . 7 Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close the front cover (lower). A caution + When closing the cover, be careful nat to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. © iweortant + Once you have removed the jammed staples, be sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for Saddle Fin- isheron p. 6:31.) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-25 A 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit if a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right appears. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed staples. € NOTE + This procedure is only required when the Saddle Fin- Isher-F2 is attached. aes are Fn Fen to med 1 open the front cover (lower) of the Finisher. 2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit. 3 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then push it up. 9-26 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Grasp the left and right ends of the staple car- tridge, and remove the cartridge. Push down part A, then pull up knob B. Remove the jammed staples, then return knob B to its original position. Return the staple cartridge to its original posi- tion. Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-27 A 9 Handling Options8 pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then return it to its original position. Q Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close the front cover (lower). A caution * When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. © weortant + Once you have removed the jammed staples, be sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for Sade Fin- ‘shor”"on p. 6-31.) 9 Handling Options 9-28 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit When paper jams occur while the punch function is being used, the screen on the right is displayed. In addition to removing the paper jam in the main unit, also check the puncher unit with the following procedure and remove any jammed paper. & NOTE + This procedure is only required when the Puncher Unit-B1 is attached. A caution Si =i eas "he pe oer. + When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the Inside ‘burns or electrical shock. of the machine, as this may result in + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your ‘hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. if they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering ar enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold w ind entering your eyes or mouth. if toner rater and consult a physician, 1. open the front cover of the puncher unit. ri f 2 Align the a of the knob to the range of mm. Finisher-F1/ Saddle 9 Handling Options9 Handling Options 3 Close the front cover of the puncher unit. Acavtion “= When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- sonal injury. 5. Remove any jammed paper. 6 Close the top cover of the puncher unit. Accaution - When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, ae this may result In pes Sonal ior. 9-30 —_Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-817 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See ‘Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,” on p. 8-2.) Finisher-F'1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-31 A 9 Handling OptionsVv 9 Handling Options Removing Punch Waste When the punch waste tray becomes full with debris, es the screen on the right appear in the display. Follow ea oe oes ey the procedure described below to remove the punch waste. € NOTE + This procedure is only required when the Puncher Unit-Bt is attached. 1. open the front cover of the puncher unit. 2 Pull out the punch waste tray. 3. Discard the punch waste. = 9-32 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B14. Return the punch waste tray to its original position. @ NOTE + Ifthe tray is not returned securely in place, you cannot make prints with the Punch mode selected, 5 close the tront cover of the puncher unit. A caution * When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in per- ‘sonal injury. Consumables @ Staple cartridge Use only the staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine. There is a space behind the front cover (upper) for storing staple cartridges (equivalent to the space occupied by three staple unit staple cartridges). We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your service representative before they run out. _——————————————— eee Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-339 Handling Options ; Copy Tray-C3 The Copy Tray-C3 is equipped with the following functions: © Collate @ Group @ Rotate © weortant + The paper size which can be selected when you set the Rotate mode are LTR/ LTAR. Parts and Their Functions Copy Tray-c3. Papers are output here. NOTE + Adjust the auxiliary tray depending on the print paper 9-34 — Copy Tray-C3Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3 |¥.a paper jam occurs in the Copy Tray-C3, a display SP == similar to the one on the right appears in the touch Se aeenetermeaead pane! display. Cheok where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that pow iste appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. A A caution * When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. + When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck- laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in ‘burns or electrical shock. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. f they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with ‘warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. + When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician, Pull out the protruding paper from the exit slot. Ss Copy Tray-C3 9.35 9 Handling OptionsOperation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters This chapter describes operations when user restrictions are enabled, the character entry method, etc. Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled 10-2 Inserting the Control Card oe = : : 110-2 Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions.......... 2.00 eceeeeeee 10-2 Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions ........... cee 108 Entering the Department ID and Password ...........0.eeeseeeeeeee cee 10-4 Operations after Turning the Power ON 10-4 Operations after Using Copy Functions. 105 Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display. ...... = 10-6 Entering Alphabet Characters .. .. 2106 Entering Special Letters 10-7 Setting in Inches........... + 10-8 10-4 A 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled Inserting the Control Card When the Control Card (option) is attached to the machine, you must insert the control card before operating this machine. ©) iwrortant + When the Basic Features screen does not appear in the touch pane! dsplay even ifthe contr card is Inserted, check the followings: - Make sure that the control card is inserted in the correct direction. Make sure that the control cards inserted as far as it can go. “Make sure that an unusable control card isnot inserted. @ note + For details on how to handle the control card, see the Control Card Instruction Manuel. Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions @ NOTE + For details on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Contro! Panel Power," on p. 1-6. 1 insert the control card into the card slot mak- ing sure it is facing the correct direction. ©) imeortant + When the control card is inserted, check if there is a reserved copy jab in the System Monitor sreen. {you remove the control card, the reserved copy jb wil be canceled. + When you reserve or interrupt ajob, do not remove the control card. Ifyou remove the contol card, the reserved copy job willbe canceled. 2 The basic screen of the selected function is eT OR displayed. 10-2 Operation When User Restrictions Are EnabledOperations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions After you finish using this machine, remove the control card. The touch panel display returns to the screen for inserting the control card. ©) iwrortant + After @ control card is removed, it must be inserted ‘again before operating the machine. + Ifyou reserved a job, donot remove the contol Card unt that job is completed. + When using the control card, we recommend checking if there isa reserved copy ja inthe Sys- tem Monitor screen. Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled 10-3 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet CharactersEntering the Department ID and Password When Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and Password must be entered before operating this machine. @ NOTE + When you are using the control card, the message “You must insert a control card.” appears in the touch panel display. Insert the control card into the card slot. (See "Inserting the Control Card," on p. 10-2.) @ NOTE 1. Press the {Department ID] key, and enter the Department ID with the Numeric keys (@-O) @ NOTE + Ifyou make a mistake when entering values, press the & key, and enter the values again. Operations after Turning the Power ON + For details on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,"on p. 1-6. er, Departnrt 0 ws Pasa rg ==aee)| eee] SAR cer te ster wot How to Enter Alphabet Characters 2. Press the [Password] key, and enter the pass- word with the Numeric keys ((0)-(@)). @ NOTE + Ifyou make a mistake when entering the password, press the @5 key, and enter the password again. + Ifa password has not been set, praceed to stop 3 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and 10-4 Entering the Department ID and Password Re Pate eet Oe Pee ere Ow fs Eero3 ross the © key. 4 the basic screen of the selected function is [era displayed. @ NOTE + if the Department ID and/or Password that you ‘entered are wrong, the message “Wrong ID or password” appears. Repeat the procedure from step 1 Operations after Using Copy Functions How to Enter Alphabet Characters ‘When operating is completed, press the key on the control panel. ‘The screen for entering the Department ID and Password appears. To operate again, enter the Department ID and Password again. © iweortant + Ifyou do not press the © key attr finishing your ‘operation, any subsequent copies willbe totaled under the same Department ID which you previ- ously entered, @ NOTE + When operating is completed, the screen for enter- ing the Password automatically appears after the ‘et time has elapsed ifyou forget to press the © key, (See “Auto Clear Function, on p. 48.) 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and Entering the Department ID and Password 10-5Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display At screens which require alphanumeric entry, enter characters using the alphabet keys displayed in the touch panel display as described below. Entering Alphabet Characters Example: Enter “canon”. 1 Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select “Alpha- bet”. @ NOTE + Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the entry mode. + If you press the [Uppercase] key, the entry mode ‘changes to the upper case mode, and upper case characters can be entered. 2 Enter “canon”. @ NOTE +The available modes and maximum number of let- ters vary depending on the purpose, «To enter a space, press the [Space] key. + To move the cursor, press the [4 ] or [> ] key. + Ifyou make a mistake when entering charactors, use the [4 ]or[ Jey and the [Backspace] key 10 delete the character. Then, enter the correct char- acter. + You can also delete ail characters you have entered by pressing the & key. + To continue entering special letters, press the [Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then, ‘enter the character. 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters 3 when you have entered all characters, press Bare eal tar Poo the [OK] key. 10-6 Entering Characters on the Touch Panel DisplayEntering Special Letters Example: Enter “6”, 1 Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select ise teed Oar ae Other". er @ NOTE es) + Each f the [Entry Mode] key shes the TOU OOHRS ea piers of the [Entry Mode] key switches the Fey aa (4) 2 Press the [¥] or [A] key to Press the desired special letter in the touch pane! display. @ NOTE + The available modes and maximum number of let ters vary depending on the purpose. + To enter a space, press the [Space] key. + To move the cursor, press the [4] or [> ] key. + Ifyou make a mistake when entering special et- ters, use the [ ] or [> ] key and the [Backspace] key to delete the character. Then, enter the correct character. + You can also delete all characters you have centered by pressing the & key. + To continue entering alphabet characters, press the [Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then, onto the character 3 when you have finished entering the special —— letters, press the [OK] key. a Tea me ac a] Entering Characters on the Touch Panel 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet CharactersHow to Enter Alphabet Characters 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and y Setting in Inches When entering values in inches in the modes which require number entry, set the inch entry function to On in the Common Settings of the Additional Functions. You can make entry in inches when you press the [Inch] key on the screen which requires number entry. ‘The example shows the inch entry in the Zoom Program mode. Press the [1] L] [1] [ and [2] keys on the Eee aaae ne touch panel display in that order. [ReneS maze The entered values is displayed as shown on the Ga right. 10-8 Setting in Inches> Appendix Specifications 14-2 Main Unit... 11-2 Feeder... 145 Paper Deck-G1 .... 214-5 Finisher-F'1/ Saddle Fi 11-6 Puncher Unit-B1 14-8 Copy Tray-C3 5 11-8 Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation ........... 11-9 Chart of Available Combination of Functions... .. 11-10 Copy Function - 14-10 Mail Box Function . .. 11-14 Index = 14-15 11° Appendix11. Appendix a Specifications Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release. Main Unit Name Type Platen Photoconductive material Copying system Developing system Fixing system Resolution Number of tones Acceptable paper stock Acceptable originals Maximum original size Paper sizes Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series Console Stationary Assi Electrostatic Transfer System Toner Projection System Heat Roller system Reading 600 dpi x 600 dpi Writing approx. 1,200 dpi x 600 dpi Printing approx. 2,400 dpi x 600 dpi 256 Plain paper Paper drawer 1, 2 : 17-Ib bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m?) Paper drawer 3, 4 : 17-Ib bond to 24-Ib bond (64 g/m? to 90 g/m?) Stack bypass: 17-Ib bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m”) Transparency’, Tracing paper’, Labels”, Heavy, Recycled, Color, Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch (‘stack bypass selected) Sheet, books, 3-dimensional objects (Up to 4.4-Ib bond or 2 kg) 14x17" Paper drawer 1, 2: LTR Paper drawer 3, 4: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR You can only change the sizes of the paper drawer 3. Stack bypass: 11"x17"/ LGL/LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR Free-size: 4" x 5-7/8" to 11-5/8" x 17" (100 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm) 14-2 SpecificationsNon-image areas Leading edge: 1/8" (4.0 mm) Left and right side: 1/8" (2.5 mm) Trailing edge: 1/8" (2.0 mm) Warm-up time When main power is turned ON: 5 minutes max. Activation time from Sleep mode: 5 minutes max. Activation time from Energy Saver mode: None :0 second 10% mode: approx. 50 sec. 25% mode: approx. 90 sec. 50% mode: approx. 180 sec. *Activation time from each mode is a rough standard until the machine is ready to copy after canceling the mode. Activation time may vary depending on the conditions under which the machine is used. (In all cases, at a room temperature of 68°F.) First copy time Platen glass selected: 3.8 seconds max. Copy speed Direct imageRUNNER 5000 41°17" 30 opm Let 36 cpm LTR 50 cpm LTRR 39 opm STMTR 50 cpm Reduction 11°x17"- STMTR (50%) 50 opm 11"x17"> LTRR (64%) 39 opm 11°17" LGL (73%) 36 cpm LGL— LTR (78%) 39 cpm Specifications 11-3 11 Appendix11° Appendix Vv Magnification Paper feeding system Exposure control Multiple copies Power source Max power consumption Dimensions (H x W x D) Installation space (W x D) Weight Enlargement LGL—+11"x17" (121%) 30 cpm LTRR > 11°17" (129%) 30 cpm STMT— 11x17" (200%) 30 cpm : Except the stack bypass. Direct Bu (40.5%) Reduction 20.789 (LGL— LTR) 733 (11"x17"-> LGL 11°15" LTR) 847 (11x17 LTR) 20.500 (11"x17"> STMT) 1 :0.250 Enlargement 1:1.214 (LGL> 11°17") 1:1.294 (LTRS 11°x1 1:2,000 (STMT 11x17") 424,000 Paper drawer 1, 2 (1,500 sheets each) Paper drawer 3, 4 (550 sheets each) Stack bypass (stack bypass tray: 50 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 g/m?); stack approx. 1/4" (5 mm) high) ‘Automatic exposure control or manual exposure control 1 1 1 1 999 sheets max. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A 1.5 kW 4-3/4" x 25-3/8" x 29-1/4" (1,136 mm x 643 mm x 743 mm) 52-5/8" x 29-1/4" (1,335 mm x 743 mm) (Dimensions of eject tray and stack bypass tray are given for extended condition.) Approx. 462 Ib (210 kg) 11-4 SpecificationsFeeder Originals 11"x 17" LGL/ LTRY LTRR/ STMT Original paper weights 13-Ib bond to 32-Ib bond (50 g/m? to 128 g/m?) Original tray capacity 100 sheets Original replacement speed 55 sheets/minute (LTR) Power source From main unit Power consumption When active 48 W max. When not active : 2.5 W max. Dimensions (H x W x D) 5-7/8" x 22-1/4" x 21-1/2" (149 mm x 565 mm x 545 mm) Weight Approx. 30.8 Ib (14 kg) Paper Deck-G1 Paper deck capacity 3,500 sheets (20-Ib bond (80 g/m?)) Power source From main unit Power consumption 40W Dimensions (H x W x D) 2-5/8" x 12-3/4" x 23" (574 mm x 323 mm x 583 mm) Weight Approx. 101 Ib (46 kg) Acceptable paper size LTR Specifications 11-8 11° Appendix11° Appendix , Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 Paper Capacity per tray 17-Ib bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m”) Saddle Stitcher Unit* : 17-Ib bond to 20-Ib bond (64 g/m? to 80 g/m?) (For cover sheets only" : 17-Ib bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m?)) [Non-collate mode] LTR/STMTR — :5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent to 1,000 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 gim’)) ‘HxA7/LGULTAR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 gim”)) [Collate mode] (Group mode] LTR/STMTR — : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent to 1,000 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 g/m?)) 1X7 VLGULTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 gim?)) [Staple mode] LTR :80 sets or 4-3/8" (110 mm) (equivalent to 750 sheets 20- Ib bond (80 g/m?)) 1'MA7/LGUUTRR 30 sets or 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20- |b bond (80 g/m?) [Non-collate}/ {Collate} [Group], with different paper size 1-3/4" (44 mm) (equivalent to 300 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 g/m?) [Staple] with different paper size 30 sets or 7/8" (22 mm) (equivalent to 150 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 g/m*)) [Saddle Stitch]* 1to Ssheets :25 sets 6 to 10 sheets : 15 sets 11 to 15 sheets : 10 sets 11-6 SpecificationsMax. stapling capacity Available offset size Available staple size Available saddle stitch size* Staple Unit LR 0 sheets 11°x17/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets Saddle Stitcher Unit" __: 15 sheets 11°17" LGL/ LTRY LTRR Corner staple: 11°x17"/ LGU LTR/ LTRR Double staple: 11°x17"/ LTR 11°17" LTRR, Saddle Stitcher Folding Method’ Roller pressure folding Saddle Stitcher Folding modet V-fold Power consumption Power source Dimensions (H x W x D) Installation location (W x D) Weight “Saddle Finisher-F2 only. 170 W max. From main unit Finisher 41-3/8" x 26-3/8" x 24-1/4" (1,052 mm x 669 mm x 614 mm) Finisher + Puncher Unit-B1 41-3/8" x 29-3/8" x 24-1/4" (1,052 mm x 744.5 mm x 614 mm) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 61-3/8" x 29-1/4" (1,559 mm x 743 mm) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1 64-3/8" x 29-1/4" (1,634 mm x 743 mm) Saddle Finisher-F2 (The width includes necessary space for when removing paper jams.) 72-518" x 29-1/4" (1,844 mm x 743 mm) Finisher-F1: Approx. 70.5 Ib (32 kg) Saddle Finisher-F2: Approx. 114 lb (52 kg) Finisher-F1 + Puncher Unit-B1: Approx. 82.4 Ib (37.4 kg) ‘Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1: ‘Approx. 126 Ib (57.4 kg) Specifications 11-7 11° Appendix11. Appenaix v Puncher Unit-B1 Paper 17-Ib bond to 110-Ib index (64 g/m? to 200 g/m?) Hole punching system ‘Sequential processing system Punch hole quantity, hole diameter 2 holes/ 3 holes, 80.5 mm Distance between punch holes 3 holes: 8-1/2" (216 mm) 2 holes: 2-3/4" (70 mm) Paper size in which holes can be punched 3 holes: 11°x17"/ LTR 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR Punch waste tray capacity Approx. 3,000 sheets (20-Ib bond (80 g/m’)) Power consumption 120W max. Power source From the Finisher Dimensions (H x W x D) 34-7/8" x 3" x 24-1/4" (886 mm x 75.5 mm x 614.4 mm) ‘Weight Approx. 11.9 Ib (5.4 kg) Copy Tray-C3 Capacity 250 sheets (20-Ib bond (80 g/m?)) Dimensions (H x W x D) 4" x 18-3/8" x 13-3/8" (100 mm x 465 mm x 340 mm) Weight Approx. 1.4 Ib (670 g) 11-8 SpecificationsOrientation @ When you set the left-side stapling @ NOTE + Please use this chart when printing on paper with logos etc., printed beforehand. Output example Original) paper orientation, settings ur 1x17, LGL um ta? LOL Orientation — ] in paper drawer 1, 2 J L_ Orientation = r | I~ = in paper drawer 3, 4 L Orientation in = = = stack bypass! it al | paper deck is i « Orientation on the platen glass | (GT = (Comer :TopLett [Comer :TopRight |Corer -TopLett q Comer D >> > PPP ble PPP Pb, >> > D> [ml >>| > | [o[>>| ep] *1 You cannot combine these modes when free size is selected. 14-10 Chart of Available Combination of FunctionsCombination available Combination unavailable Priotty to latter-sot mode @||>|[<: Pricey te Image Combination, Image Separation, nd Booklet mode (ato can be changed) Function intend to set “Tworpage Separaion Tage Combination Image Separation “Original Frame Erase. ‘Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Right Margin Loft Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Shift lal Front Cover ‘Shoot insertion (PanteaTBaRR) (Chapter Page Transparency rtereaving iI Booklet Booket/ Sadale Stich Front Cover (Printed BIarK) ‘Sample Set - Diferent Size Originals x ‘Job Build ‘Sharpness NegaPosi Image Repeat he SA x Mror image Deel el De belxlxxfocrx xx Eibtbad EEA ESEdESESE | ele efx }hx Px bebxlebebeixbe bebe beblxp< bet eh bell FabsEdEdESEGEAE bebe befxlx al be *2You can set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode. "3 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Reserve Copy mode. *4You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set. Chart of Available Combination of Functions 14-11 11° Appendix11 Appendix Combination available Combination unavailable Priostyt later set mode Prot to Image Combination, Image Separation, and Bookict ‘mode (Ratio can be changed) (e||>||x! Function intend to set Enlargement ‘Zoom Designation XY Zoom ‘aul Zoom MOGs Zoom Program. “Entre image ‘Automatic Exposure Contrl Prinjad Image Photo Text t Text Phat ‘Automatic Paper SelecTon. lx Falaal ‘Auras Papa Seckon,Ao OreTD7 xpx Falalal be xb xb ‘Auto Drawar Switching ‘Stack Bypass _ FP Fi ‘Collate ‘Group Rotate Coliating Bex Rotate Grouping ‘Offset Colaie ‘Offset Group. by ‘Staple Collate ‘Saddle Stich | ieee belx lt Px bl Px x be epee lx tex bebe Bed ESEESESE GES Hole Punch Interrupt Copy 3 Reserve Cop) Fel 12 Sided x x Fg 2) 2 Sided ed 2) 1-Sided. x! Eat bebe bebe bebe bell) Book Sided x id Debs bebelxf xl i Eg *5 You cannot make Interrupt copy while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while changing the settings after the Sample Set has been made. *6 You cannot reserve a copy job while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while chang- ing the settings after the Sample Set has been made. 11-12 Chart of Available Combination of FunctionsCombination available Combination unavailable Prot olater-set mode e|/>||x Prot o image Combination, Image Separation, and Bookct mode (Ratio can be changed) ear itor Function intend to sot “Tworpage Separation Image Combination Tage Separation ‘Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase ght Margin Let Margin “Top Margin Botiom Margin lala Shift Front Cover ‘Sheet insertion (PHAnteaBIarK) Ghapier Page “Transparency TeTaving Baokiet Bookiet/ Saddle Stich Front Cover (Printed STaPK) ‘Sample Set Diferent Size Ongials ‘Job Build yarpness ‘NegaPosi image Repeat De ee ee ele ee cee Miror image bel ele bxbxlx Debi bel b> Ppl pexpebex eee be belch be 3 11. Appendix 7 am | Beli epxIx Dee clo Del Px DDD RDI Delobel el ebb pele hebe lle D> [lox xx bebxlepx bebe beelx bell Deb bax ax exh bebe eb Pax bbl bebe exist ig es bz ig be x Fa xxixlx x *7You cannot combine these modes when the automatic paper selection is selected. When selecting the paper manually, you can combine these modes. — Chart of Available Combination of Functions 11-1311° Appendix Mail Box Function Combination avaiable >| Combination unavallabia [a Forty toate set made Priaiy te Image Combination, Image Separation, and Booket ‘mode (Ratio can be changed) Function intend to set Plater glass scaring Feocor scanning ‘Document size Aute Selec Document size Manual Select Flacord size Auto Select “Record size Manual Select Enlargement Zoom Designation XY Zoom ‘Auto Zoom x Zoom Program ‘Automatic Exposure Control Photo moder Printed Image Photo moda’ Photo Text Tex Pha 7-Sidea Seaniing 2.Sided Scanning “Tworpage Separation ci Tage Combination Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Bincing Erase fd Booklet Scanning Sz Diflerent Size Onginals i “Job Build ‘Sharpness “NegaPosi fe lx] (Slaiaised xh] Pll. b> >> lsiele) >>> >>> b> Is >> ssa Tele Am > >| Py bepele else ell bebehe x xe hx bie xh Bs > bebe xbelx] xxl *8 You can combine these modes when the Job Build mode is set. 11-14 Chart of Available Combination of FunctionsIndex W102. eee ito ateeeeceenn ceeeees E31; ilaooaooondanseneaqnnn5annaa 40n1 , BON ee eeeeeee eee 1b2-Sided...... 2)1-Sided pean a A Adding Toner...........cee ‘Additional Functions Screen Additional Funotions key... . ce Additional Functions Settings Table . ae Adjusting a Paper Drawer........ 0s cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Adjustment’Cleaning. 0.0.2... 66. eeeeee sees eeeeeeseeeeeeees Audible Tones : ee Auto... ‘Auto Clear Setting Auto Collate ‘Auto Orientation ‘Auto Paper Selection . 2:35, 4-12 ‘Auto Print ce ee oF Auto Stat... ee cece eee Auto XY Zoom. .... Back Key... eee eee eee 19 Basic Features Screen eee 33 Binding Erase Black toner........... ern ee Book Frame Erase ... ee pen cece eee 3-25, 4-82 BOOKP2-SidED eee eee eee ween eeee we 245 Bookiet ere eee ne 3-9, 4-60 Booklet Scanning ........... 000 eceeeeee cece eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 427 Box Selection Screen See vee teeeeeee eee es 41 11° AppendixW 11) Appendix Box Sev Store........ 6-45 Breaker 13 c Cancel Key 19 Cassette-P3 TAB Change Auto Clear Time. oc6 ee 6-26 Change Auto Sleep Time ....... 55 cece ence 625 Clear key 15 Clip holder. 15 Collate = 248 Common Settings ... 66 ‘Consumables 712 Control Card ..... ee... Control panel. Control panel power switch Copy Ratio. ce Copy Settings .......... Copy Tray-C3..... 6c cece ee aoe Counter Check key ...... cee cee AS Cover/Job Separator ee ee eee Cover/Sheet Insertion eee bobs beHea sop soscEousese 34 Daily Timer Settings Or Date & Time Settings Department ID Management. 657 Device Information Settings 6-69 Device Status ... ; 5:24 ifferent Size Originals ...... 3-40, 4-41 play contrast dial 15 Document Size Select. . 48 Done Key... 0... .eeee ee 19 Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS. 6-10 Duplexing Transport unit 13 11-16 IndexG Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode ............0eeeseveeeee Energy Saver key Energy Saver Mode Entire Image... Error Feeder... Feeder Cleaning . Feeder cover. Finisher Finisher-F1 Fixing Transport unit, Frame Erase.............. Front cover ....... Function Key Wake Up..........2.+ Group ..... Guide Function Screen... Guide key . . Hole Punch... . ID key... aon Image Combination............ Image Orientation Priority...... Image Repeat Image Separation Inch Entry Initial Function........ Initialize Common Settings . Initialize Copy Settings . . Interrupt key . . : Interrupt Mode Index 2-48, 4-51 8:30 1-4 - 2-50 WA7 A 11° Appendix11° Appendix Job Build... Bee eet ee care a) Job Duration Display... 00... eee eee e cette eee e teen ee eee e settee teeter ener ees 688 L Light ooo. ceeees Loading Paper.........0.0000+ Low-Power Mode Time... . 5 a cess 629 LTRR/ STMT Original Selection cee teeter eeeeees B16 M MAIL BOX key... . on0 pee ao) Mail Box Settings. ae ; cee 645, Main Power indicator. pee ee ee 15 Main power switch we 12 Manual Paper Selection... 0... ese. eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 210 Margin... ccceee eee 318 Merge Documents....... open 4-63 Mirror Image pue0586 ee ee cee 862 loci Mlorrcr y Eteeteeteeteeteer nt estentearea ee ee eestereerenree eee ee 3-45 N Nega/Posi = 3-57, 4-45 Next Key 19 Non-collate . . 2-49 Numeric keys... cveeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees cee eee 1S ° OK key. eee 19 Options feeb ee ence cece = 73 Original Frame Erase «00.2.2... 3-28, 4-30 Original output area 1-4 Original supply tray 1-4 1148 IndexPaper Deck-Gt . Paper drawer 1, 2 Paper drawer 3, 4 Paper Jams... Paper Select. . Paper stock. Photo Photo Mode Platen glass Preset Zoom Printed img. Printing Priority Priority Printing... Processing/Data indicator. Puncher Unit-B1 Rear side of platen glass cover. 13 Recall Pee eee eee ete ee ee 3-55 Report Settings. 671 Reserve Copy... 57 Reserve Print 59 Reset key 215 Right cover . 1-2 Rotate... 2-50 Saddle Finisher-F2.......... Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment .. Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning . .. Sample Print... . Sample Set....... SCAN key...... ‘Secured Documents . cee oA Self-diagnostic (Error) Display 0.0.0.2... 00. ceee Service Call Message Setting Confirmation... Sharpness........ Shift Index 11-19 11° Appendix11° Appendix " Slide guide Special Features Screen 1/2. . Special Features Screen 2/2 Specifications Stack bypass... ‘StackBypass Setting . Standard Key Settings. . Standard Local Print Settings Standard Scan Settings Standard Settings aoe Standard Stack Bypass Settings Staple ... Start key . Stop key cies Store Paper Type... ....eeee eee ‘System Manager Settings. .... ‘System Monitor ‘System Monitor Screen. System Settings ............ 00 Text. TextPhoto . cee Time Until Unit Quiets Down... Timer Settings. . Toner supply cover a Transparency interleaving Tray Designation .... ‘Two-page Separation Two-sided Mode ‘Two-sided Originals. ..... ‘Two-sided Printing... User's Data List....... ee ieee eee ee eer ecil Ww Wire Cleaning 831 11-20. IndexXY ZOOM. eee cece eee cece cee e ee eeeeteeeeeeneeeteeeeeea eens 2-25, 4-21 Zoom. ......... - +224, 447 Zoom Designation.......... 1218, 4-14 Zoom Fine Adjustment... 0... eeeeee eee vere 630 + 2:28, 4-17 Zoom Program ——$<$<$—$ $e Index 11-21 11. Appendix\ | K | ! I I I x | | I I | | x I ! I l | x | | | I I x | I I ! I K | I System Management Mode of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series The following pages regarding the use and operations of the System Management mode, should be cut out of the manual by the supervisor or the system manager. You can set restrictions to the System Settings of the Additional Functions or manage the settings set by other users by setting the System Settings of the Additional Functions. This mode is call the System Management mode ‘The operations which can be done in the System Management mode are as follows: + Box Document Management + Box Setting Management Entering the System Management Mode @ When Department ID Management is Enabled Enter the System Manager ID in the [Depart- Carga eres ment ID], and the System Password i te fii ee [Password] with the Numeric keys ((0)-()), ae and press the ((0) key. ee The machine enters the System Management —_— Mode. Aft ertertg © a Papert, exce te 0 ty Afar Sg tu maces, fre be (ey or @ When Department ID Management is not Enabled 1 Press the “@™ key. ta) © 2 @ “a-G) ® © ® ©2 Press the [System Settings] key. eh Sct erat Factores (ma Stes) lar eee finer Sreros —] (fe Bx Sree a oe faa a fete Stine) fimrtetre | 3 Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with the Numeric keys (()-()), and press the key. ‘The machine enters the System Management Mode. @ NOTE + Enter the number stored under System Manager Settings. (See “Setting/ Changing the System Man- ‘ager ID and Password,*on p. 6-54.) Canceling the System Management Mode = fess Ee. ears eyed Press the key. ‘The System Management Mode is canceled. @ NOTE + The System Management Mode is also canceled ‘even when Auto Clear has taken place. The display returns to the screen ofthe function selected in the Auto Clear Setting. POe ©OeCq CO OG olele -—->---- - se He ee RR ee- op HH He HH me He ee ee Managing Box in the System Management Mode You can operate the box documents stored by the users. For example, you can operate a box that the user has forgotten the password, erase unnecessary documents, or in case of need, access to box documents of other users. 1 Enter the system Management Mode. 14 © ® ® O® 2 Press the corr FS om 3 Proceed to operate the box. (See Chapter 4 ‘Using the Mail Box Functions.7Changing the Box Settings in the System Management Mode You can change the box settings restricted with a password. For example, you can initialize unnecessary box, or change the name of the box. 1 Press the “Ze)~ key. @ NOTE + When the machine is already in the System Man- agement mode, press the "25" key and proceed to stop 5. When Department ID Management is enabled, enter the System Manager ID in the [Department ID], and the System Password in the [Password], with the Numeric keys ((@)-()), and press the © key. [4 OO I OO OO¢ HO © a Ee Tepe ten 0 ame Te Pee Pear rE) (ar = Ae afar tora the ancibo, ise th in 2 Press the [System S Fae ventor (amen erro] fly Serer rr ets | [a Box Stirs a Frevar Stren (a fever settee) fart setts3 Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with the Numeric keys ((0)-(@)),and press the key. ‘The machine enters the System Management Mode. @ NOTE + Enter the number stored under System Manager Settings. (See "Setting! Changing the System Man- ager ID and Password,"on p. 6-54.) 4 Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Additional Functions. screen. ies few (pez, eon ae (Bere 5 ress the [Mall Box Settings] key, and change the settings. (See ‘Setting Specifications of the Mail Box = is Function (Mai Bor Setings)," on p. 6-45.) fer ete] ft toc setts (asin Printer Settres [Dare crete Tact on fatto ence Tare (Came Sens) (Ry Sativas —] I | K ! ! | | ! x | I I l ! | K 1 ED) systen tenagowent voce I I I ! K l I I | | x | I I I I K \ ICheck Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the Breaker This page should be cut out of the user's guide and copied for future use. ‘After cutting out of the user's guide, store this page in a safe place near the machine. How to Inspect the Breaker periodically Follow the procedure described in the “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker” on p. 26 of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series User's Guide, once or twice a month. How to Fill in this Check Sheet Fill in the date of inspection, and the name of inspector. When the inspection finished normally, write a check mark under "OK". If not, contact your service representative. (Also write a check mark under *NG”,) [Result Date of Result Date of I Inspection | "SPector “OKT NG Inspection | IsPector TOK T Na

You might also like

• The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck: A Counterintuitive Approach to Living a Good Life

  

  From Everand

  The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck: A Counterintuitive Approach to Living a Good Life

  Mark Manson

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (5819)
• The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You're Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are

  

  From Everand

  The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You're Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are

  Brené Brown

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (1092)
• Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It

  

  From Everand

  Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It

  Chris Voss

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (845)
• • Magazines
  • Podcasts
  • Sheet music
• Principles: Life and Work

  

  From Everand

  Principles: Life and Work

  Ray Dalio

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (609)
• The Glass Castle: A Memoir

  

  From Everand

  The Glass Castle: A Memoir

  Jeannette Walls

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (1717)
• Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance

  

  From Everand

  Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance

  Angela Duckworth

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (590)
• Sing, Unburied, Sing: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  Sing, Unburied, Sing: A Novel

  Jesmyn Ward

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (1104)
• Hidden Figures: The American Dream and the Untold Story of the Black Women Mathematicians Who Helped Win the Space Race

  

  From Everand

  Hidden Figures: The American Dream and the Untold Story of the Black Women Mathematicians Who Helped Win the Space Race

  Margot Lee Shetterly

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (897)
• Shoe Dog: A Memoir by the Creator of Nike

  

  From Everand

  Shoe Dog: A Memoir by the Creator of Nike

  Phil Knight

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (540)
• The Perks of Being a Wallflower

  

  From Everand

  The Perks of Being a Wallflower

  Stephen Chbosky

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (2104)
• The Hard Thing About Hard Things: Building a Business When There Are No Easy Answers

  

  From Everand

  The Hard Thing About Hard Things: Building a Business When There Are No Easy Answers

  Ben Horowitz

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (348)
• Bad Feminist: Essays

  

  From Everand

  Bad Feminist: Essays

  Roxane Gay

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (1018)
• Elon Musk: Tesla, SpaceX, and the Quest for a Fantastic Future

  

  From Everand

  Elon Musk: Tesla, SpaceX, and the Quest for a Fantastic Future

  Ashlee Vance

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (474)
• Her Body and Other Parties: Stories

  

  From Everand

  Her Body and Other Parties: Stories

  Carmen Maria Machado

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (822)
• The Outsider: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  The Outsider: A Novel

  Stephen King

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (1866)
• The Emperor of All Maladies: A Biography of Cancer

  

  From Everand

  The Emperor of All Maladies: A Biography of Cancer

  Siddhartha Mukherjee

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (271)
• The Sympathizer: A Novel (Pulitzer Prize for Fiction)

  

  From Everand

  The Sympathizer: A Novel (Pulitzer Prize for Fiction)

  Viet Thanh Nguyen

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (122)
• Angela's Ashes: A Memoir

  

  From Everand

  Angela's Ashes: A Memoir

  Frank McCourt

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (441)
• Brooklyn: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  Brooklyn: A Novel

  Colm Tóibín

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (1947)
• The Little Book of Hygge: Danish Secrets to Happy Living

  

  From Everand

  The Little Book of Hygge: Danish Secrets to Happy Living

  Meik Wiking

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (401)
• A Man Called Ove: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  A Man Called Ove: A Novel

  Fredrik Backman

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (4770)
• The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century

  

  From Everand

  The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century

  Thomas L. Friedman

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (2259)
• Steve Jobs

  

  From Everand

  Steve Jobs

  Walter Isaacson

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (808)
• The Yellow House: A Memoir (2019 National Book Award Winner)

  

  From Everand

  The Yellow House: A Memoir (2019 National Book Award Winner)

  Sarah M. Broom

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (98)
• Devil in the Grove: Thurgood Marshall, the Groveland Boys, and the Dawn of a New America

  

  From Everand

  Devil in the Grove: Thurgood Marshall, the Groveland Boys, and the Dawn of a New America

  Gilbert King

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (266)
• The Art of Racing in the Rain: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  The Art of Racing in the Rain: A Novel

  Garth Stein

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (4208)
• A Tree Grows in Brooklyn

  

  From Everand

  A Tree Grows in Brooklyn

  Betty Smith

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (1929)
• A Heartbreaking Work Of Staggering Genius: A Memoir Based on a True Story

  

  From Everand

  A Heartbreaking Work Of Staggering Genius: A Memoir Based on a True Story

  Dave Eggers

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (231)
• Yes Please

  

  From Everand

  Yes Please

  Amy Poehler

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (1902)
• Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln

  

  From Everand

  Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln

  Doris Kearns Goodwin

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (234)
• The Woman in Cabin 10

  

  From Everand

  The Woman in Cabin 10

  Ruth Ware

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (2522)
• Fear: Trump in the White House

  

  From Everand

  Fear: Trump in the White House

  Bob Woodward

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (738)
• Wolf Hall: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  Wolf Hall: A Novel

  Hilary Mantel

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (3811)
• John Adams

  

  From Everand

  John Adams

  David McCullough

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (2409)
• On Fire: The (Burning) Case for a Green New Deal

  

  From Everand

  On Fire: The (Burning) Case for a Green New Deal

  Naomi Klein

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (74)
• The Light Between Oceans: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  The Light Between Oceans: A Novel

  M.L. Stedman

  Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars

  4.5/5 (789)
• Manhattan Beach: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  Manhattan Beach: A Novel

  Jennifer Egan

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (792)
• The Constant Gardener: A Novel

  

  From Everand

  The Constant Gardener: A Novel

  John le Carré

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (104)
• The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America

  

  From Everand

  The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America

  George Packer

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (45)
• Rise of ISIS: A Threat We Can't Ignore

  

  From Everand

  Rise of ISIS: A Threat We Can't Ignore

  Jay Sekulow

  Rating: 3.5 out of 5 stars

  3.5/5 (137)
• Little Women

  

  From Everand

  Little Women

  Louisa May Alcott

  Rating: 4 out of 5 stars

  4/5 (104)

Footer menu

Back to top

About

• About Scribd
• Everand: Ebooks & Audiobooks
• SlideShare
• Press
• Join our team!
• Contact us
• Invite friends

Support

• Help / FAQ
• Accessibility
• Purchase help
• AdChoices

Legal

• Terms
• Privacy
• Copyright
• Do not sell or share my personal information

Social

• Instagram Instagram
• Twitter Twitter
• Facebook Facebook
• Pinterest Pinterest

Get our free apps

About

• About Scribd
• Everand: Ebooks & Audiobooks
• SlideShare
• Press
• Join our team!
• Contact us
• Invite friends

Legal

• Terms
• Privacy
• Copyright
• Do not sell or share my personal information

Support

• Help / FAQ
• Accessibility
• Purchase help
• AdChoices

Social

• Instagram Instagram
• Twitter Twitter
• Facebook Facebook
• Pinterest Pinterest

Get our free apps

• Documents

Language:

English

close menu

• English(selected)
• Español
• Português
• Deutsch
• Français
• Русский
• Italiano
• Română
• Bahasa Indonesia

Learn more

Copyright © 2024 Scribd Inc.

Language:

English

close menu

• English(selected)
• Español
• Português
• Deutsch
• Français
• Русский
• Italiano
• Română
• Bahasa Indonesia

Learn more

Copyright © 2024 Scribd Inc.